InRoads MicroStation

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

TRN014740‐1/0006

Road Fundamentals Using InRoadsInRoads V8i (SELECTseries 2) with MicroStation

Power InRoads V8i (SELECTseries 2)

Bentley Institute Course Guide

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Road Fundamentals Using InRoads Dec‐2011

2 Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Trademarks

AccuDraw, Bentley, the “B” Bentley logo, MDL, MicroStation and SmartLine are registered trademarks; PopSet and Raster Manager are trademarks; Bentley SELECT is a service mark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc.

AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

All other brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Patents

United States Patent Nos. 5,8.15,415 and 5,784,068 and 6,199,125.

Copyrights

©2000‐2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

MicroStation ©1998 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

All rights reserved.

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Table of Contents

IntroductionCourse Exercises __________________________________ 14Document Conventions ____________________________ 17

A Tour of InRoadsObjectives _______________________________________ 20InRoads Products _________________________________ 21InRoads: An Assortment of Tools _____________________ 23What Can you Accomplish with InRoads? ______________ 24Additional Information_____________________________ 25Starting InRoads __________________________________ 26Exercise ‐ Start InRoads ____________________________ 27CAD Graphics ____________________________________ 28The InRoads Explorer ______________________________ 29Explore the Interface ______________________________ 31InRoads File Types ________________________________ 32Resource Files____________________________________ 34Exercise ‐ Open a Preference File_____________________ 36Workflow ‐ The Big Picture__________________________ 37Exercise ‐ Create a CAD File _________________________ 39MicroStation Units ________________________________ 41Project Defaults __________________________________ 43Exercise ‐ Set Up Project Defaults ____________________ 45Exercise ‐ Reference a Basemap______________________ 47Creating and Saving Files ___________________________ 49Closing Files and Exiting InRoads _____________________ 51Exercise ‐ Closing Files _____________________________ 53

Introduction to SurfacesObjectives _______________________________________ 56Surfaces ________________________________________ 58Surface Triangulation ______________________________ 59Surface Features__________________________________ 60

Dec‐2011 Road Fundamentals Using InRoads

Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated 3

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Road Fundamentals

4

Table of Contents

Feature Types ____________________________________ 61Using Breakline Features ___________________________ 63Exterior Features _________________________________ 64Interior Features__________________________________ 65Preference Sets___________________________________ 66The Style Manager ________________________________ 67The Style Manager (Cont’d) _________________________ 68The Named Symbology Manager _____________________ 70Exercise ‐ View Surface Commands ___________________ 71Surface Properties ________________________________ 74Exercise ‐ Surface Review___________________________ 75Collecting Surface Data_____________________________ 77Importing Surface Data ____________________________ 78Feature Properties ________________________________ 80Summary and Review______________________________ 82ReviewTask ______________________________________ 85

Introduction to GeometryWhere Are We in the Big Picture? ____________________ 90Objectives _______________________________________ 91What is a Geometry Project? ________________________ 93Geometry Project Structure _________________________ 94Opening Files ____________________________________ 95What is a Horizontal Alignment? _____________________ 96Types of Geometry ________________________________ 97Types of Graphics That Can Be Imported_______________ 99Alignment Integrity________________________________ 100Exercise ‐ Import Alignment from Graphics_____________ 101Horizontal Alignments _____________________________ 103Exercise ‐ Define Stationing _________________________ 105Horizontal Alignment Annotation ____________________ 107Locate/Graphic Select Button _______________________ 109Exercise ‐ View Horizontal Annotation_________________ 110Geometry View Options ____________________________ 112Exercise ‐ Create Another Alignment with a Different Style 114The Project File ___________________________________ 117Exercise ‐ Create a Project File _______________________ 119Summary and Review______________________________ 120Review Task _____________________________________ 123Meadow Park Drive ‐ Alignment _____________________ 126

Using InRoads Dec‐2011

Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Table of Contents

Creating Horizontal Alignments Using PI’sObjectives _______________________________________ 128Horizontal Curve Set_______________________________ 130Productivity Tips __________________________________ 132Exercise ‐ Create Alignment with Precision _____________ 134Review Practice Alignment__________________________ 137Horizontal Curves _________________________________ 138Exercise ‐ Define Horizontal Curves ___________________ 140Design Criteria ___________________________________ 142Exercise ‐ Define Horizontal Curves Based on Design Criteria ___________________________________ 143Summary and Review______________________________ 145Review Task _____________________________________ 148Meadow Park Drive ‐ Known Alignment Points__________ 152Meadow Park Drive ‐ Example Completed Alignment_____ 153

Creating Horizontal Alignments Using ElementsObjectives _______________________________________ 156Horizontal Elements _______________________________ 158Productivity Tips __________________________________ 161Fixed Horizontal Elements __________________________ 162Element Manipulation _____________________________ 164Exercise ‐ Create New Geometry _____________________ 166Floating Horizontal Elements ________________________ 167Free Horizontal Elements ___________________________ 169Exercise ‐ Create Alignment using Horizontal Elements ___ 170Precision Input ___________________________________ 173Exercise ‐ Create Alignment using Precision Keyins_______ 174Check Integrity ___________________________________ 177Exercise ‐ Check Alignment Integrity __________________ 178Summary and Review______________________________ 179Review Task _____________________________________ 182Horizontal Alignment Detail _________________________ 186Meadow Park Drive ‐ Example Completed Alignment_____ 187

Profiles and Cross SectionsObjectives _______________________________________ 190Profiles _________________________________________ 192Create Profile ____________________________________ 193Exercise ‐ Create Existing Ground Profile_______________ 195Cross Sections____________________________________ 197Create Cross Section_______________________________ 198



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Road Fundamentals

6

Table of Contents

Viewing Cross Sections_____________________________ 200Exercise ‐ Create Cross Sections______________________ 201Summary and Review______________________________ 203Review Task _____________________________________ 206

Creating Vertical Alignments Using PI’sObjectives _______________________________________ 210What is a Vertical Alignment? _______________________ 212Vertical Alignment Creation _________________________ 213Adding Vertical PI’s________________________________ 214Exercise ‐ Create a New Vertical Alignment_____________ 216Editing the Vertical Alignment _______________________ 218Exercise ‐ Edit the Vertical Alignment _________________ 220Define Vertical Curve Set ___________________________ 222Exercise ‐ Define Vertical Curves _____________________ 223Vertical Annotation _______________________________ 226Exercise ‐ Annotate the Vertical Alignment _____________ 228Summary and Review______________________________ 229Review Task _____________________________________ 232

Creating Vertical Alignments Using ElementsObjectives _______________________________________ 238Vertical Alignments _______________________________ 240Vertical Elements _________________________________ 241Fixed Vertical Elements ____________________________ 243Element Manipulation _____________________________ 245Exercise ‐ Create a New Alignment ___________________ 247Floating Vertical Elements __________________________ 248Free Vertical Elements _____________________________ 250Exercise ‐ Create Vertical Elements ___________________ 251Check Integrity ___________________________________ 256Exercise ‐ Check Alignment Integrity __________________ 257Vertical Annotation _______________________________ 258Exercise ‐ Vertical Annotation _______________________ 260Summary and Review______________________________ 261Review Task _____________________________________ 264

Roadway Designer OverviewObjectives _______________________________________ 270Templates _______________________________________ 272Applying Templates _______________________________ 273



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Table of Contents

Templates ‐ Surface Models_________________________ 274Create Template Dialog ____________________________ 275Template Names__________________________________ 276Current Template Window__________________________ 277Template Preview Window _________________________ 278Dynamic Settings _________________________________ 279Components _____________________________________ 280Merging Components______________________________ 282Basic Template Creation Workflow ___________________ 283Exercise ‐ Creating a Template from Components _______ 284Roadway Designer ________________________________ 287Roadway Designer Dialog___________________________ 288Roadway Designer ‐ Plan View Window _______________ 289Roadway Designer ‐ Profile View Window______________ 290Roadway Designer ‐ Cross Section View Window ________ 291Roadway Designer Fundamentals ____________________ 292Basic Roadway Designer Workflow ___________________ 294Exercise ‐ Create a Roadway Design___________________ 296Summary and Review______________________________ 298

TemplatesWhere are we in the Big Picture?_____________________ 302Objectives _______________________________________ 303Constraints on Template Points ______________________ 305Visual Indicators for Parent‐Child Relationship __________ 308Visual Indicators for Common Constraints _____________ 310Exercise ‐ Observe Template Constraints Behavior _______ 312Adding and Deleting Constraints Graphically____________ 315Exercise ‐ Adding and Deleting Constraints _____________ 316The Sign of the Distance and Slope ___________________ 318Simple Component ________________________________ 319Exercise ‐ Creating a Template of Simple Components ____ 321Template Point Names _____________________________ 323Exercise ‐ Editing Template Point Names_______________ 325Constrained and Unconstrained Components___________ 327Exercise ‐ Adding a Constrained Component____________ 329Exercise ‐ Adding a Constrained Component (Continued)__ 330Basic Component Creation Workflow _________________ 333Creating End Conditions ____________________________ 334End Conditions Settings ____________________________ 336Exercise ‐ Creating End Conditions____________________ 338Exercise ‐ Adding a Ditch End Component______________ 342Testing the End Conditions__________________________ 345



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Road Fundamentals

8

Table of Contents

Exercise ‐ Testing the End Conditions _________________ 346Basic End Condition Component Creation Workflow _____ 348Summary and Review______________________________ 349Review Task _____________________________________ 352Roadway Detail___________________________________ 355Curb and Gutter Detail _____________________________ 356Cut and Fill Detail _________________________________ 357

Template TransitioningObjectives _______________________________________ 360Template Transitioning_____________________________ 362Multiple Template Drops ___________________________ 363Template Transition Areas __________________________ 364Transition Area Colors _____________________________ 365Exercise ‐ Transition from Two to Three Lanes __________ 366Transition Verification _____________________________ 368Exercise ‐ Edit Transition Connections _________________ 370Template Transitioning_____________________________ 371Exercise ‐ Transition Testing_________________________ 372Template Transitioning Workflow ____________________ 374Summary and Review______________________________ 375Review Task _____________________________________ 378Transition Detail __________________________________ 381

Template Point ControlsObjectives _______________________________________ 384Template Point Controls____________________________ 386Point Control Commands ___________________________ 387Exercise ‐ Assign Horizontal Control __________________ 388Summary and Review______________________________ 390Review Task _____________________________________ 393Project Details____________________________________ 396

SuperelevationObjectives _______________________________________ 398Superelevation Terminology ________________________ 400Superelevation Terminology ________________________ 401Superelevation Terminology ________________________ 402Superelevation Terminology ________________________ 403Creating Superelevation____________________________ 404Superelevation Wizard _____________________________ 405



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Table of Contents

Table Wizard_____________________________________ 406Exercise ‐ Create a New Corridor _____________________ 408Superelevation Section_____________________________ 410Superelevation Controls____________________________ 412Exercise ‐ Create a Superelevation Section _____________ 413Fixing Overlap ____________________________________ 415Exercise ‐ Correcting a Superelevation Overlap__________ 417Viewing the Superelevation _________________________ 419Superelevation Colors _____________________________ 420Superelevation Plan View Window ___________________ 421Superelevation Cross Section View Window ____________ 422Superelevation Profile View Window _________________ 423Superelevation Diagram View Window ________________ 424Shoulder Rollover Locks ____________________________ 425Example ‐ No Shoulder Rollover______________________ 426Example ‐ Applying Shoulder Rollover _________________ 427Shoulder Rollover Locks Basic Workflow _______________ 429Exercise ‐ Shoulder Rollover_________________________ 430Superelevation Reports ____________________________ 432Exercise ‐ Superelevation Report _____________________ 433Summary and Review______________________________ 434Review Task _____________________________________ 437Project Task Details _______________________________ 440

Design ChangesObjectives _______________________________________ 442Template Library Synchronization ____________________ 444Template Drop Indicators___________________________ 445Synchronize with Library Button _____________________ 446Exercise ‐ Synchronizing the Roadway Design File________ 447Template Revisions in the Roadway Designer __________ 450Exercise ‐ Revising a Template _______________________ 451End Condition Exceptions___________________________ 454Exercise ‐ End Condition Exceptions __________________ 455Parametric Constraints_____________________________ 457Exercise ‐ Using a Parametric Constraint _______________ 458Summary and Review______________________________ 461Review Task _____________________________________ 464

Cross Sections and AnnotationWhere Are We in the Big Picture? ____________________ 468Objectives _______________________________________ 469



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Road Fundamentals

10

Table of Contents

Cross Section Creation _____________________________ 471Surface Display ___________________________________ 472Create Cross Section Dialog _________________________ 473Exercise ‐ Create Cross Sections______________________ 474Custom Cross Section Sets __________________________ 477Exercise ‐ Create Custom Cross Sections _______________ 478Summary and Review______________________________ 481Review Task _____________________________________ 484

Introduction to VolumesObjectives _______________________________________ 488End‐Area Volume _________________________________ 490End‐Area Volume Prerequisites ______________________ 492Surface Type _____________________________________ 493End‐Area Volume Dialog ___________________________ 494Exercise ‐ Calculate End‐Area Volume _________________ 495Volume Reports __________________________________ 497Triangle Volumes _________________________________ 498Exercise ‐ Calculate Triangle Volume __________________ 499Triangle Volume by Station _________________________ 500Exercise ‐ Triangle Volume by Station _________________ 501Summary and Review______________________________ 502Review Task _____________________________________ 505

Introduction to ReportsObjectives _______________________________________ 510What is XML and XSL? _____________________________ 512InRoads XML Report Process ________________________ 513Quick Reports ____________________________________ 514Exercise ‐ Reviewing Horizontal Geometry _____________ 515Exercise ‐ Review a Surface _________________________ 517XML Reports _____________________________________ 518Other XML Reports________________________________ 519Exercise ‐ Create Geometry Report ___________________ 520Exercise ‐ Try Another Format _______________________ 522Saving a Report for Printing _________________________ 523Saving the XML ___________________________________ 525Exercise ‐ Changing the Format Options _______________ 526Exercise ‐ Station Base Report _______________________ 527Volume and Template Reports_______________________ 529Summary and Review______________________________ 530Review Task _____________________________________ 533



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Table of Contents

Productivity ToolsObjectives _______________________________________ 538InRoads Locks ____________________________________ 539Style Lock _______________________________________ 540Pen/Pencil Lock___________________________________ 541Snap Lock _______________________________________ 542Station Lock _____________________________________ 543Report Lock______________________________________ 544Tracking_________________________________________ 545



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Road Fundamentals Using InRoads Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Introduction

Welcome to the Road Fundamentals Using InRoads with MicroStation course.

Dec‐2011 Introduction


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Course Exercises

Course Exercises

The class is made up of multiple modules each of which includes two types of learning activities; Practice Exercises and Review Tasks.

The narrative/lecture portion of each module introduces new concepts and tools. Throughout the narrative/lecture portion you will find step‐by‐step Practice Exercises to give you guided hands on experience with the concepts.

At the end of most modules you will also find a Review Task.

The intent of the training material is exclusively to create an optimal learning opportunity for those who have never worked with the software or for those who may not have worked with the software for a long period of time.

All files used in this course are located in the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\ folder. The files for the practice and task exercises are located in the \{Chapter Title}\Practice\ and \{Chapter Title}\Task\ folders. Files used by multiple modules are located in the _Standards and _Common Reference sub folders.

Introduction Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Course Exercises

Practice Exercises

The Practice Exercises for each chapter are independent of one another and can be used without having to complete the exercises in previous chapters. Most Practice Exercises use a Project file (*.rwk). When you load the project file, all other supporting files such as the fieldbook, surfaces, geometry databases, etc. are loaded.

The Practice Exercises are prepared using standard civil engineering practices but do not reflect nor comply with any known state or local design standard. Review Tasks

Review Tasks

Review Tasks are challenging exercises designed to reinforce the concepts taught in this and previous modules and to provide you a self evaluation of how well you understand the concepts. The tasks do not provide step by step instructions. Instead they require you to draw on your new knowledge to solve problems.

Not all students will finish the tasks in the time allowed. If you are not able to complete a task you should review the previous practice exercises to reinforce the concepts and then attempt the task again. As time permits you may be able to do this during class or you can continue your studies after the conclusion of the class. Completion of review tasks is not required to move on to the next module in the training.

InRoads or Power InRoads

This course is designed to work with both InRoads and Power InRoads. All civil design tools are available in both InRoads and Power InRoads. InRoads is an application that runs on top of either MicroStation or AutoCAD software. Power InRoads is a standalone application that includes both the InRoads and the MicroStation capabilities.

The major difference in InRoads and Power InRoads is how they are accessed. InRoads is accessed via an InRoads desktop icon (or the Start menu) which activates both MicroStation and InRoads at the same time. Alternatively you can access the MicroStation desktop icon (or the Start menu) and then activate InRoads using the Applications menu. Power InRoads is accessed from it’s own desktop icon (or the Start menu) which activates both MicroStation and Power InRoads at the same time.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Course Exercises

InRoads tools are accessible from the InRoads explorer or pulldown menus by selecting Applications > InRoads Group > .... In Power InRoads the same tools are available from the InRoads explorer or pulldown menus under the respective groups (i.e. Survey, Surface, etc.).

Metric or Imperial

Where there is a difference required for the Imperial and Metric datasets the Metric instructions are shown in square brackets[].

For example, enter the pavement width of 12feet [3.6 Meters].



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Document Conventions


Style conventions used throughout the course guide are shown in the following table.

Item Convention Example

Menu names and commands

Bold, names separated with > symbol

• File > Open • File > Compress > Design

Dialog box actions Bold

• Click Apply.• Click the Graphic Select button to the right of the Horizontal Alignment Include box.

• In the Segment Type list, click Lines.

Dialog box field names Italic

• Enter Hemfield Road in the Alignment Name box.

• Click the Graphic Select button to the right of the Horizontal Alignment Include field.

• In the Segment Type list, click Lines.

Keyins Bold• Enter Hemfield Road in the Alignment Name field.

File names Italic

• Open the file Working Graphics.dgn in the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Geometry\Practice\ folder.

File path Non‐italic

• Open the file Working Graphics.dgn in the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Geometry\Practice\ folder.

New terms or emphasis Italic

• The template library contains templates, which represent typical sections of the proposed roadway.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

A Tour of InRoads

In this chapter, we will learn about the InRoads family of products and navigate the InRoads Explorer together. We will also learn how to set up an InRoads project.

Dec‐2011 A Tour of InRoads


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives

In this lesson we will...

• Learn what you can do with the InRoads products.

• Learn how to start and exit InRoads.

• Learn how to navigate and use the InRoads interface.

• Learn the InRoads file types.

• Learn how to set up an InRoads project.

A Tour of InRoads Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

InRoads Products

InRoads Products

The InRoads family of civil solutions provides civil engineering tools that facilitate workflow, and interfaces with both MicroStation and AutoCAD.

InRoads

InRoads provides civil engineering tools for road and corridor design. Examples of the InRoads design functionality include: road and site modeling capabilities, alignment tools, typical sections, superelevation, and volume computation. InRoads includes all of the functionality delivered in InRoads Site.

InRoads Site

InRoads Site provides site design tools, digital terrain modeling, and coordinate geometry tools needed to generate contours, profiles, cross sections, and cut‐and‐fill volumes.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

InRoads Products

InRoads Survey

InRoads Survey enables you to transfer data from electronic fieldbooks (EFBs) to the MicroStation or AutoCAD environment, with interactive data editing capabilities. Contours can be displayed, surveys adjusted and results visually verified.

InRoads Bridge

InRoads Bridge provides tools to lay out simple and complex bridge geometry based on the existing ground conditions. InRoads Bridge also has interactive tools to create precise 3D geometric models from which drawings and reports can be created.

InRoads Storm & Sanitary

InRoads Storm & Sanitary offers 3D modeling, design and analysis, drawing production, and data management capabilities for storm and sanitary drainage networks.

Bentley Rail Track

Bentley Rail Track provides an industry‐specific set of rail design, maintenance, and manufacturing tools. Bentley Rail Track also provides tools for geometry, site and track design, rail manufacturing, reporting, viewing, and annotation. Bentley Rail Track also includes all the functionality delivered in InRoads.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

InRoads: An Assortment of Tools

InRoads: An Assortment of Tools

Think of InRoads as a toolbox containing an assortment of tools. Each tool has a specific use. When the individual tools are combined and used in a specific order, it’s called a workflow. Workflows are used to accomplish specific project‐oriented tasks. An example of a workflow is “Creating a Horizontal Alignment.” Workflows can be used on simple and complex projects.

In this course, we will learn about workflows that accomplish common tasks. We will also learn about the tools used in these workflows.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

What Can you Accomplish with InRoads?

What Can you Accomplish with InRoads?

InRoads provides the functionality to accomplish a variety of projects that include:

• Road and corridor design

• Road widening

• Road resurfacing

• Landfill design

• Site design

• Residential and commercial land development

• Right‐of‐way and property layout



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Additional Information

Additional Information

All InRoads products have a built‐in Help system. Click Help in any InRoads dialog box to access the help system for the active tool. The help system is also available by selecting Help > Contents from the InRoads menu.

The Be Communities web site is the destination for the world’s infrastructure community members to connect, communicate, and learn from each other. This professional networking is done through a variety of means, including:

• Forums – for exchanging ideas and discussing a wide range of technical subjects.

• Wiki – a free‐form resource within the Be Communities for creating and maintaining reference content.

• Blogs – online journals for communities and individuals to publish commentary, opinions, and ideas.

• Resource Galleries ‐ a place to share and exchange images and files with community members.

To access the Be Communities, visit www.bentley.com.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Starting InRoads

Starting InRoads

Launch InRoads or Power Inroads from the Start > All Programs > Bentley menu choices.

‐or‐

Double‐click the InRoads or Power InRoads Shortcut created on your desktop.

‐or‐

1 Start MicroStation.

2 Select Applications > InRoads Group > Activate InRoads.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Start InRoads

Exercise ‐ Start InRoads

Start InRoads or Power InRoads

1 Double‐click the InRoads or Power InRoads icon

or launch InRoads/Power InRoads from the Start > All Programs > Bentley menu choices.

The File Open dialog opens.

Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\A Tour of InRoads\Practice\

2 Select the file Starting InRoads.dgn, then click Open.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

CAD Graphics

CAD Graphics

InRoads uses CAD files to display CAD graphics. The CAD file used by InRoads is referred to as the “Working” file. This file can be a scratch file or it can be a final plan sheet file. Most of the graphics displayed in the CAD file by InRoads are recognized by InRoads commands. You can interact with InRoads graphics using the InRoads tools.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

The InRoads Explorer


InRoads Explorer

The InRoads Explorer is divided into four major parts:

Menu Bar – The Menu Bar contains menus for all of the tools available for the active InRoads modules. Since the InRoads suite is composed of different modules, the menus displayed will vary depending on which product and Application Add‐ins are active. Menus are shared across the InRoads Suite of Products.

Workspace Bar – The Workspace Bar is the control center for all InRoads Project Data.

Feedback Pane – The Feedback Pane displays details about the data selected in the Workspace Bar.

Status Bar – The Status Bar is the location on the bottom‐left corner of the InRoads Explorer. It displays InRoads messages, data readout, and errors. If the



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


command being used requires that something be located or identified in the CAD file, additional command prompts will display in the MicroStation Status Bar.

Other InRoads Explorer Items

Scroll Bars – When resizing the InRoads Explorer, some data may not be visible either in the Workspace Bar or Feedback Pane. Scroll Bars allow you to view this data without resizing the InRoads Explorer.

Right‐click Pop‐up Menus – The InRoads Explorer enables access to common functions through pop‐up Menus. These menus are displayed by right‐clicking.

Dialog Boxes – When a tool is selected using a tool button, or from the InRoads menu, a command dialog box commonly displays so that more options related to the command can be specified.

Toolbars – InRoads contains built‐in toolbars that can be “docked” in the InRoads Explorer. You can also create custom toolbars.

Show/Hide Explorer – The entire InRoads explorer can be hidden from view by right‐clicking in the MicroStation view window and selecting Explorer Show/Hide. Select this command again to show the Explorer. If the InRoads Explorer is hidden, InRoads commands can be accessed through the MicroStation Tasks.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Explore the Interface

Explore the Interface



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

InRoads File Types

InRoads File Types

InRoads File Types

The InRoads road design process uses several different file types. All InRoads data is stored in external files. The CAD file is used to view a graphical representation of the design data, but the graphic files do not store the InRoads data. Deleting the CAD graphics does not affect the InRoads data. For example, if the graphics that represent existing ground surface contours are deleted, the InRoads existing ground surface file is not modified.

Surface File (.dtm)

The Surface file stores features that are made up of random points, breakline, and boundary data. The Surface file also contains triangle data. The features and the triangles together represent existing ground and design surfaces. Multiple surface files may be open for editing at the same time. Although multiple Surfaces can be opened in InRoads, only one Surface can be edited at a given time.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

InRoads File Types

Geometry Project File (.alg)

The Geometry Project File stores geometric data including horizontal and vertical alignments and COGO points. Multiple Geometry Project files may be loaded at the same time. Although multiple geometry projects can be opened in InRoads, only one Geometry Project file can be edited at a given time.

Template Library File (.itl)

The Template Library File stores templates and template components. Different components can be assembled to build templates, which define the typical sections of a roadway. Only one Template Library file may be open for editing at a given time.

Roadway Design (.ird)

The Roadway Design stores information defining the parameters of a roadway design. These roadway design parameters are defined using a tool called the Roadway Designer. The Roadway Designer is used for corridor management, assigning template drops, creating superelevation, reviewing the design, defining template transitioning and creating design surfaces. Only one Roadway Design file may be open for editing at a given time.

Project File (.rwk)

The Project file provides an easy method of opening and saving a number of InRoads data files in a single operation. No InRoads data is stored in this file; it is an ASCII file that lists the InRoads data files to open.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Resource Files

Resource Files

Resource Files

The InRoads Preference file (.xin) controls how data will appear when it is displayed in the CAD file. Preference sets store data‐related settings and dialog box settings for later retrieval. Listed below are a few of the parameters that are stored in preference files.

• How a surface will appear when viewed in plan, profile and cross sections

• How geometry, such as alignments and points, will appear when viewed in plan and profile

• How Profile and Cross Section grid spacing, text labels and axis symbology will appear

• Parameters and values that have been entered and selected in dialog box fields, which can be saved for later recall

Numerous settings are saved to the InRoads Preference file and provide a means by which to implement project‐specific and organizational standards.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Resource Files

Preference File (.xin)

The Preference file stores the preferences accessible on each dialog box, Style definitions, and Named Symbology definitions. Styles and Named Symbology definitions control the display of Surfaces and Geometry elements.

Drafting Notes File (.dft)

The Drafting Notes file stores note definitions created with the various note placement tools found on the Drafting menu.

Style Sheets File (.xsl)

The Style Sheets file is used to format a raw .xml file to create a finished report.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Open a Preference File

Exercise ‐ Open a Preference File

Open the Preference File

When InRoads starts, a preference file is opened automatically. The default preference file is named Civil.xin and is located in the C:\Program Files\Bentley\InRoads Group *\Data\ folder, where * represents the version of software.

Locate the training‐specific preference file in the Bentley Training folder:

1 Select File > Open from the InRoads menu.

2 Browse to the path C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Standards\.

3 Select the Preference file Bentley Training.xin.

4 Click Open.

A message stating that the Bentley Training.xin file is open appears in the Status Bar at the bottom of the InRoads Explorer.

Note: the Open dialog remains open after you open a file.

5 Click Cancel to close the Open dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Workflow ‐ The Big Picture


Workflow

InRoads does not force the user into a linear workflow. It is a powerful tool that can be used to do a wide variety of complex tasks, such as a cloverleaf interchange design, site design or staking reports. Since workflows can vary widely depending on the scope of the project, it is difficult to describe the InRoads workflow. It is however, reasonable to say that most projects follow the general workflow as shown here.

Project Setup

Setup of the CAD files is usually the starting point of a project. Concurrently, a field survey also takes place to gather existing information. The information that the surveyor typically supplies can come in many formats, including raw data, graphics or ASCII text. InRoads is flexible enough to handle a variety of formats. The surface is then evaluated using a variety of methods, such as cross sections, profiles, and contour display.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Create Geometries

Once the surface is deemed acceptable, the designer begins creating geometry. InRoads provides a wide variety of tools for geometry creation that can be used in any workflow. There are many different ways to create geometry and the steps involved may vary depending on the project scope. However, geometry creation typically involves creating horizontal geometry, creating existing ground profiles and cross sections, and creating vertical geometries.

Design Roadway Corridor

Once the geometries are complete, the designer will typically create new templates or use existing standard templates. These templates are then used to design a corridor model and generate a proposed surface.

Evaluate Results

Once a corridor is designed and processed, the designer can use a variety of tools to evaluate and edit the results of the design. Reports can be created for important data such as geometry, cross sections, and volumes. In addition, more specialized reports such as grade books, survey stake‐out, slope stake, and legal description reports can be created. InRoads reports can be traditional hardcopy reports or electronic data such as automated machine control grading.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create a CAD File


Create a MicroStation File

1 Select File > New in the MicroStation menu.

2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\A Tour of InRoads\Practice\.

3 Click Browse.

The Select Seed File dialog appears.

4 Browse to the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Standards\ folder.

5 Select the Bentley_Training_seed.dgn file.

6 Click Open.

The Select Seed File dialog disappears, and the selected seed file is shown at the bottom of the New dialog.

7 Enter Practice Working File.dgn in the Files field.

8 Click Save.

The file that was just created is opened, as seen in the title bar of the MicroStation window.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Verify MicroStation Working Units

1 Select Settings > Design File from the MicroStation menu.

2 In the DGN File Settings dialog, select the Working Units category.

Ensure that Master Unit is set to US Survey Feet [Meters]

3 Click OK to close the DGN File Settings dialog.

Review the InRoads Workspace Bar Tabs

Note: The InRoads Workspace Bar tabs are located at the bottom of the InRoads Workspace. A few of the tabs are visible, and you can view the others by using the arrow keys to scroll left and right.

1 Select the Surfaces tab from the InRoads Workspace Bar.

Notice that the Default icon is outlined in red, indicating that it is the “active” file ‐ the one that is affected by any actions we take in InRoads.

2 Select the Geometry tab from the InRoads Workspace Bar.

Notice that the Default Geometry Project is active.

3 Select the Preference tab from the InRoads Workspace Bar.

Notice that the preference file remains opened, as indicated in the Status Bar. InRoads files remain open even when creating new CAD files or switching between CAD files.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

MicroStation Units

MicroStation Units

MicroStation Units and the Survey Foot

It is important that you note the two different lengths of a foot in the United States, and MicroStation V8 must be set up correctly or you may not be drawing what you think you are drawing.

MicroStation stores all data internally in meters. The meter is the official base unit of measure throughout the world. Even though feet and inches are the dominant units of measure in the United States, they are legally defined based on the meter.

MicroStation uses the working unit definition to convert coordinates and distances to and from meters. Therefore, when the working units are set to feet and inches, MicroStation still stores the coordinates in meters and converts to feet and inches to display coordinates, distances, measurements, dimensions, etc.

Because MicroStation V8 converts all values from feet (or any other unit) to meters to store the data, it is critical that you understand the conversion process and the desired foot measurement. If not, your data may not be correct.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

MicroStation Units

There is a difference between a foot and a Survey foot. The following definition is taken from the 1991 edition of ASTM publication E380‐89a (Standard Practice for Use of International System of Units).

“The U. S. Metric Law of 1866 gave the relationship, 1 metre equals 39.37 inches. Since 1893 the U.S. yard has been derived from the metre. In 1959 a refinement was made in the definition of the yard to bring the U.S. yard and the yard used in other countries into agreement. The U.S. yard was changed from 3600/3937 m to 0.9144 m exactly. The new length is shorter by exactly two parts in a million.

At the same time it was decided that any data in feet derived from and published as a result of geodetic surveys within the U.S. would remain with the old standard (1 ft = 1200/3937 m) until further decision. This foot is named the U.S. survey foot.”

Therefore the following definitions are in existence today:

1 foot = .3048000 m

1 survey foot = 1200/3937 m .3048006 m

The foot in MicroStation’s standard unit list is based on the foot definition, not the survey foot definition. This is the correct definition for most work outside of the civil engineering and surveying disciplines. If, however, the data is based on geodetic survey measurements, using the standard unit definition in MicroStation may yield incorrect results. Most survey documentation in the US is based on the survey foot. However, it is important to check with your surveyor or local authorities because some data is based on the foot definition.

How much difference really exists between a foot and a survey foot? It depends on what you are measuring. As you can see below, large numbers such as engineers typically work with when using State Plane Coordinates can have significant error if the wrong foot definition is used.

• Short distances < 1000 feet

US Survey Foot = International Foot (measured 1/100 of a foot)

• At 100,000 feet

Definitions result in a difference of about .2 feet

• At 1,000,000 feet (Approximate size of many State Plane Coordinates)

Definitions result in a difference of about 2 feet



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Project Defaults

Project Defaults

Project Defaults

Project Defaults define the default location for opening and saving InRoads data files related to a project, as well as the project preference files that are loaded when InRoads is activated. The Project Defaults are stored locally in the Windows registry.

To set up the Project Defaults, select the File > Project Defaults command in the InRoads menu. The Set Project Defaults dialog box is divided into two primary sections: Default Preferences and Default Directory Paths.

• Default Preferences – InRoads preference files that are loaded when a Project Defaults Configuration Name is selected.

• Default Directory Paths – the folder locations where these types of InRoads files are located. The specific files to be loaded for a project are identified using a Project file (.rwk).



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Project Defaults

Multiple Project Default configurations can be created and saved under different names. The path for all file types can be set to the same location, or separate paths can be set for each file type.

To create a new Configuration Name or modify an existing one, click Apply. This action writes the information to the registry of the computer that you are currently using.

To activate a different Configuration Name, select it and click Close.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Set Up Project Defaults


InRoads Files Which Open Automatically

When InRoads starts, a Preference file is needed to specify the settings and parameters of each dialog box. The Preference file is opened as specified in the Project Defaults, if configured. If the Project Defaults are not configured, InRoads will open a preference file which is located in the product folders.

InRoads also creates a “Default” Surface and “Default” Geometry Project. The “Default” Surface and Geometry Project are empty and can be used for scratch work, but are normally not saved during a typical InRoads workflow.

Set Up Project Defaults

In this exercise, you will create a Project Default configuration named Road Fundamentals and assign to it the default folder locations for File > Open and File Save commands.

1 From the InRoads menu, select File > Project Defaults.

The Project Defaults dialog appears.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


2 Click New.

3 Enter Road Fundamentals in the New Configuration dialog and click OK.

The Set Project Defaults dialog updates with the new Configuration Name.

4 Click in the Preferences (*.xin) field and click Browse.

5 Browse to the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Standards\ folder, and select the Bentley Training.xin file.

6 Click Open.

7 Click in the Projects (*.rwk) field and click Browse.

8 Browse to the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\ folder, and open it.

9 Click Open.

The Projects (*.rwk) field updates with the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\ folder.

10 Repeat this procedure to complete the following fields:

11 Verify that the Project Default Directory field is blank. Delete any text that is in this field.

This setting MUST be blank or the .rwk files used in this training dataset will not load properly.

12 Click Apply, then click Close.

InRoads will use this Project Default definition until it is changed. The specified preference file is automatically opened when InRoads is activated. The folder locations become the defaults when using the File > Open and File > Save As commands.

Surfaces (*.dtm):C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\

Geometry Project (*.alg):C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\

Template Libraries (*.itl):C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\

Roadway Design (*.ird):C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Reference a Basemap


Referencing a Survey Data Basemap

A graphic drawing or basemap of the survey area is commonly provided for the designer to use as a backdrop during the design process.Using MicroStation, the basemap will be referenced to the working file. By referencing the basemap, all of the information in the basemap is visible; however, it cannot be modified.

Attach a Reference File

1 From the MicroStation menu, select File > References.

The References dialog appears.

2 Select Tools > Attach.

3 Browse to the folder C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\A Tour of InRoads\Practice\.

4 Select the Practice_Existing.dgn file, and click OK.

The Reference Attachment Settings dialog appears.

5 Select Coincident ‐ World in the Orientation list.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


6 Click Ok to attach the reference.

The Reference dialog appears. It displays the Practice Existing.dgn file, with its attachment method set to Coincident ‐ World.

7 Close the References dialog.

You will now view the attached reference file in the MicroStation window.

8 Select the Fit View icon in the MicroStation View window toolbar.Exit MicroStation and InRoads by clicking on the Close button at the top right of the MicroStation screen.

9 From the MicroStation menu select File > Save Settings.

The next time the file is opened, the view will be set to see the reference file.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Creating and Saving Files


Creating New Files

New InRoads files can be created by selecting File > New from the InRoads menu. In the New dialog box, use the tabs to select the data type to create. Next, enter the desired Name, complete the other parameters, and select Apply. The data appears in the Workspace Bar of the InRoads Explorer (after you select the appropriate tab).

When using the File > New command, the new data is stored in virtual memory (loaded) in InRoads.

The data creation tools do not store the InRoads data to the computer hard drive; the files only exist in virtual (or temporary) memory. Unless saved to disk, the new InRoads data will be lost when InRoads is closed.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Saving Files

When an InRoads data file is created or loaded from disk, it resides in virtual memory. Editing this data does not save it to the hard drive. The data is held in memory until a command is executed to save the data to disk. You must use the Save commands to periodically save your work. If files are closed or InRoads is exited before saving, a prompt will appear asking if you wish to save the file before exiting.

InRoads allows you to save surfaces and Geometry Projects using a different internal name than the external name (or Filename).

• The internal file name is the name given to a data type when it is created using the File > New command. This is also the name that appears in the InRoads dialog boxes.

• The external file name is the name given to the data type when it is saved on the disk using the File > Save command. The external files have the extensions .alg and .dtm.

For example, you can create a surface using the File > New command and name it Existing Ground. When you save that surface using the File > Save > Surface command, you can save it to a file named SR1045_Existing.dtm. When you open the file SR1045_Existing.dtm, all references to that surface in the InRoads dialog boxes would be Existing Ground.

It is highly recommended that you keep the internal and external names the same.

InRoads automatically uses the Save As functionality when saving InRoads data that has not been previously saved, even when using the File > Save command. However, you can optionally use the File > Save As command if you choose. The File > Save command saves the active surface, geometry, etc. To save non‐active data you should use the Save As command, which allows you to select the data you want to save.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Closing Files and Exiting InRoads


Closing Files

A file can be removed from InRoads virtual memory by selecting File > Close from the InRoads explorer menu. If the file has been previously saved to disk, the InRoads data is preserved in the disk file. If the InRoads data has not been saved to disk, the data is lost. Each InRoads data file can be closed separately or all the InRoads data files can be closed at one time by selecting File > Close > All.

Exiting InRoads

To exit InRoads, select File > Exit from the InRoads Explorer. If data that is currently loaded in InRoads has not been saved to disk, an alert appears asking if the data should be saved. Click Yes to save only the InRoads data shown in the alert. Click Yes to All to save all currently loaded InRoads data. If the file has not been previously saved to disk, the Save As dialog box appears so that you can specify the filename and folder.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


NOTE: If you are using Power InRoads, you cannot exit InRoads while leaving MicroStation open. Close both applications at the same time by clicking the Close button on the upper right of the MicroStation screen.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Closing Files


Close All Files

1 Select File > Close > Close All from the InRoads menu.

An alert box opens.

2 Click Yes to close all the files.

3 Select File > Exit from the CAD file menu.

The CAD file closes.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Introduction to Surfaces

In this chapter, we will learn about the basic concepts of Surfaces. We will display the surface contours, triangles and features of a Surface. We will also learn about the properties of a Surface.

Dec‐2011 Introduction to Surfaces


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn about surfaces and the types of data that defines a surface.

• Display surface contours, features and triangles.

• Learn about the surface properties.

Introduction to Surfaces Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Surfaces\Practice\.

2 Select the file View Surface.dgn, then click Open.


1 Select the Preferences tab in the InRoads Explorer.

2 Verify that the preference file Bentley Training.xin is in the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Standards\ folder.

The preference file should be automatically opened from the project defaults previously set up. If the file is opened, skip to the next topic (Surfaces).

If the file is not loaded, complete the following steps.


4 Change the Files of type to Preferences (*.xin).

5 Browse to theC:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Standards\ folder.

6 Select the file Bentley Training.xin and click Open.

7 Click Cancel to close the dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Surfaces

Surfaces

Surfaces

A surface is a representation of the physical terrain. Surface points are connected together to form surface triangles. This process is known as triangulation.

The terms surface and Digital Terrain Model (DTM) can be used interchangeably. Both terms refer to a triangulated model representing a physical terrain such as the existing ground or proposed design.

Current versions of InRoads software typically use the term “surface” instead of digital terrain model or DTM. However, many other software applications refer to their models as digital terrain models.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Surface Triangulation



To have known elevations throughout the surface, the surface must be triangulated. You can triangulate a surface by selecting Surface > Triangulate Surface.

This command forms triangles from the surface points by activating the triangulation algorithm. This algorithm, based on Delaunay's criteria, creates small, triangular planes that define the terrain surface.

Since the x,y,z coordinates of each triangle's vertices are known, the elevation of any point on the resulting triangular plane can be computed through interpolation.

The Maximum Length option is used to limit the length of triangles. Changing the maximum segment length automatically removes unwanted long triangles, which span across areas where the terrain data is unknown. Any triangle with a side longer than the maximum segment length will not be created in the surface. A maximum length of zero allows a triangle of any length to be created.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Surface Features

Surface Features

Features

InRoads uses the term feature to refer to the points and lines that are contained in a surface. The features within the surface define how each point is displayed and how it influences the triangulation of the surface.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Feature Types

Feature Types

Feature Types

A feature is made of one or more points. The feature type affects how the triangles which connect the points together are formed.

Random

Random features, also called spot points, represent non‐uniformly spaced points that have no direct relationship to other points. Random features are commonly found when the surveyed area consists of an open field or grassy area, since there are no identifiable terrain features.

Breakline

Breakline features represent a linear discontinuity in a surface such as a ridge, ditch, edge of pavement, centerline, or curb. The breakline feature type specifies that all points in the feature are connected as a linear segment. When the surface is triangulated, the triangles are formed so that no triangle leg crosses any breakline features. This maintains the integrity of the slope



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Feature Types

between breakline feature points during triangulation, resulting in a more accurate surface.

Contour

Contour features are linear features that come from contour data, which is commonly available from mapping agencies. Contour features are triangulated in the same way as breakline features. Surfaces created from contour data are normally not as accurate as surfaces created from Breakline and Random features.

Interior

Interior features are closed shaped linear features that represent a void or hole in the surface. No triangles are formed inside the interior features, and there can be unlimited interior features in a single surface. Examples include: building footprints, lakes, and obscure areas.

Exterior

Exterior features are closed shaped linear features that form a boundary around the surface. No triangle will be formed outside the exterior feature. An exterior feature is commonly used to prevent triangles from being formed in areas where the survey data is not known. It is also used to maintain cut and fill lines on a proposed design. There can be only one exterior feature in a single surface.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Using Breakline Features



To produce an accurate surface, it is typically necessary to supplement the random features with strings or shapes of points collected along linear breaks in the ground. For example, an existing ground surface will likely contain line strings along all major breaks in the terrain, such as edges of roadway, edges of waterways, and so on.

Since breakline features hold the linear relationship between points, breaklines more accurately model the linear features in a surface.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exterior Features

Exterior Features

Exterior Features

Exterior features (also called exterior boundaries) are closed shaped linear features that form a boundary around the surface. No triangle is formed outside the exterior feature. An exterior feature is commonly used to prevent triangles from being formed in areas where the survey data is not known. It is also used to maintain cut and fill lines on a proposed design. You can only have one exterior feature in a single surface.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Interior Features

Interior Features

Interior Features

Interior features are closed shaped linear features that represent a void or hole in the surface. No triangles are formed inside the interior features. You can have unlimited interior features in a single surface.

Examples include: building footprints, lakes, and obscure areas.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Preference Sets

Preference Sets

Preference

A Preference is a group of settings for an InRoads command. These settings can be saved and then retrieved at a later time.

For example, you can create two Preference sets for the View Contours command, one called Existing Surface, and the other called Finished Surface, where the first displays contours at 5’ intervals and the other at 10’ intervals.

You can assign a Preference set to the View Contours command for your current session, by loading the Preference set before running the command. To do that, open the View Commands dialog box (select Surface > View Surface > Contours), click Preferences, select the Preference name, and click Load. Once the Preference set is opened, it remains opened for that session.

A user‐defined default preference set (or “Preferred Preference”) is opened when the dialog is first opened. You can set the preferred default preference by selecting File > Project Defaults in the InRoads menu and setting the Preferred Preference Name.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

The Style Manager

The Style Manager

The Style Manager

The Style Manager is used to configure the way InRoads displays graphics. It controls the graphic display (symbology) of surface features, geometry features and survey features. It also controls whether these features are displayed or not.

The Style Manager is where styles are created and edited. To access the Style Manager, select Tools > Style Manager. Click New or Edit to create new Feature Styles or edit existing ones. One style can apply to Surface, Geometry, and Survey, and once the New Style or Edit Style dialog box opens, you can access a leaf for each of those feature types.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

The Style Manager (Cont’d)


Style Manager Leaves

There are five leaves on the left pane of the Edit Style or New Style dialog. The Surface Features, Geometry Features, and Survey Features leaves allow you to specify how a feature is to be displayed when it occurs in surface data, geometry data or survey data. There is also a General leaf and a Symbology leaf.

General Leaf

Specifies which feature the Style can be applied to.

Symbology Leaf

Specifies the Named Symbology used for the graphic display.

Surface Feature Leaf

The Surface Feature leaf controls how surface features are displayed. The Settings leaf of the Surface Feature leaf controls whether features can be displayed in the Plan, Profile and/or Cross Section View. The Symbology leaf of



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


the Surface Feature leaf defines which Named Symbology will be used for displaying the feature in the Plan, Profile and/or Cross Section View.

Geometry Feature Leaf

The Geometry Feature leaf controls how geometry features are displayed. Geometry has four leaves which control how Points, Lines, Arcs and Spirals are displayed.

Survey Feature Leaf

The Survey Feature leaf controls how survey features are displayed.

The Style Manager is used in conjunction with Survey Codes. This link is covered in greater detail in our Survey Fundamentals class.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

The Named Symbology Manager

The Named Symbology Manager

Named Symbology Manager

A Named Symbology defines how a point, line, or text will be displayed in CAD. Named symbology is used by the Style Manager to define the display of graphics, controlling the color, level, weight, and line style of displayed elements. It controls the display of text. It also specifies which cells and symbols will be used to display points.

The Named Symbology Manager is used to create and edit named symbology in InRoads. To access the Named Symbology Manager, select Tools > Named Symbology Manager.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ View Surface Commands


In this exercise, you will open a surface using two different Preference Sets and compare the resulting contour graphics. You will also view the surface triangles and surface features.

Open a Surface


2 Open the surface Hemfield Existing.dtm from the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Common References\ folder.

The Status Bar says the file Hemfield Existing.dtm is open.


The dialog stays open so you can easily load multiple surfaces, or other types of InRoads data, in a single operation.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Load a Preference Set and View the Surface Contours

1 Select Surface > View Surface > Contours.

The View Contours dialog opens.

2 Click Preferences at the bottom of the dialog.

3 Select the Existing Surface preference.

4 Click Load.

5 Click Close to close the Preferences dialog.

6 Click Apply.

Note: The View Contours dialog box remains open.

7 Select the MicroStation Fit View command.

Notice the contour graphics.

Change the Preference Set and View the Surface Contours

1 Click Preferences in the View Contours dialog box.

2 Select the Finished Surface preference.

3 Click Load.


5 Click Apply.

6 Close the View Contours dialog.

Notice the difference in the contour graphics.

View the Surface Triangles

1 Select Surface > View Surface > Triangles.

2 Click Preferences.

3 Select the Existing Surface Preference.

4 Click Load.


6 Click Apply.

7 Click Close to close the View Triangles dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


View the Surface Features


2 Open the surface Existing Survey.dtm from the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Common References\ folder.

Existing Survey is now the active surface.


4 Select Surface > View Surface > Features.

5 Click Apply.

6 Click Close to close the View Features dialog.

7 Select the MicroStation Fit View command.

Notice the display of the two different surfaces you have loaded.

8 Select Surface > Fit Surface.

The view zooms to show the active surface which is currently the Existing Survey surface.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Surface Properties

Surface Properties

Surface Properties

Immediately after loading a surface, you should review the surface’s properties to quickly verify the surface.

To access the Surface Properties dialog box, right‐click on the name of the surface in the Workspace Bar of the InRoads Explorer and select Properties. Another way to access the Surface Properties command is to select Surface > Surface Properties.

You can only review the properties of one surface at a time. You can change the name of the displayed surface here by entering the new name and clicking Apply.

Advance Tab

The advanced tab includes pick lists to define the Named Symbology definition for displaying the surface on cross sections and profiles.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Surface Review


Review the Surface Properties

1 Select Surface > Surface Properties.

The Surface Properties dialog box appears.

2 Ensure that Hemfield Existing is shown in the Surface field.

The Surface field shows the active surface. Selecting a different surface name sets that surface as the active surface.

3 Review the Minimum and Maximum coordinates in the lower left corner of the dialog box.

Create a Review Surface Report

1 Click Report, and review the results.

2 Select Save As.

3 Enter Hemfield Existing.txt for the File name.

4 Save the file to the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Surfaces\Practice\ folder.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Exit the CAD Software

1 Close the Results dialog.

2 Close the Surface Properties dialog.

3 Exit the CAD software.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Collecting Surface Data



Field surveys, aerial photography, and contour maps are all sources for collecting surface data. Generally, the most accurate data comes from field surveys.

While all methods of collecting surface data are valid, the design project type dictates the accuracy and level of detail required.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Importing Surface Data


The following are ways to bring surface data into InRoads:

Survey

The easiest method for importing surface data into InRoads is the Survey application. Using Survey, the raw data from the survey data collector is imported and processed. A surface can be created directly from the processed data.

DEM Import

This command loads Digital Elevation Model (DEM) data into a surface. DEM data offers a way to create surface models where detailed survey accuracy is not required.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Text Import Wizard

The Text Import Wizard allows you import surface data in a variety of ASCII formats. The Text Import Wizard is flexible because you can describe the format of the files you are importing.

Import Surface From Graphics

The Import Surface From Graphics command allows you to create surfaces from 3D CAD graphics. Importing surface data from graphics is a widely‐used method of bringing surface data into InRoads.

LandXML

Land XML is a specialized XML data file format containing civil engineering and survey data commonly used in the land development and transportation industries.

The Land XML file format provides the following capabilities:

• Transferring engineering design data between producers and consumers

• Providing a data format suitable for long‐term data archival

• Providing a standard format for electronic design submission

Surface Creation and Editing is not taught in this course. Surface Creation and Editing step‐by‐step exercises are available in other courses. Please visit www.bentley.com/LearningPaths to review these additional training options.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Feature Properties

Feature Properties

Feature Properties

The Feature Properties tool is used to view and edit the properties of features stored in the surface file. To access the feature properties tool, select Surface > Feature > Feature Properties.

A list of individual features stored in the surface are displayed in the dialog box. Remember, all coordinate points used for a surface must be stored as a feature.

Feature Name

Every feature in a surface has a name. Each feature name in a surface must be unique. For example, in a surface there might be four edge of pavement features, but they cannot all have the name EOP. Therefore, the feature names could be called EOP1, EOP2, EOP3, and EOP4.

Each feature has an associated feature style, which describes how and where a feature will display. For example, all four edge of pavement features could have a



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Feature Properties

feature style named Exist_EOP. All four edges of pavement would then look the same, even though their names are different, because they are using the same feature style.

Triangulation

One of the properties of a feature is the feature type. The feature type can be Random, Breakline, Contour, Interior or Exterior.

Another triangulation property is whether the feature is included in the triangulated model. When the Exclude from Triangulation option is selected, InRoads will not include the selected feature when building a triangulated model. A common use for this is underground or overhead utilities. The utility still exists in the surface, but it does not affect the triangulation of the surface.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary

You are now able to:

• Understand surfaces and the types of data that defines a surface.

• Display surface contours, features and triangles.

• Understand and use surface properties.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:

Before continuing, let’s reinforce what you have learned.

1 True or False: An InRoads surface is a representation of the physical terrain.

• True

• False

2 List three types of surface features.

1 – __________

2 – __________

3 – __________

3 True or False: Named symbology defines how graphics are displayed.

• True

• False

4 True or False: Named symbology is defined using the Style Manager.

• True

• False



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 True or False: A surface is a representation of the physical terrain.

True – An InRoads surface is a digital terrain model of the physical terrain. Commonly a surface is created to model the existing or original ground terrain and another surface to model the proposed or design terrain.

2 List three types of surface features.

There are five types of surface features. Each type of surface feature has a special behavior and purpose.

1 – Random

2 – Breakline

3 – Contour

4 – Interior

5 – Exterior

3 True or False: Named symbology defines how graphics are displayed.

True – Named symbology defines the graphic display properties for linear, text, and point elements. Once defined, elements associated with the named symbology will always appear the same. Named symbology is a very powerful tool used to maintain design and drafting standards. Named symbology is stored in the .xin preference file.

4 True or False: Named symbology is defined using the Style Manager.

False – Named symbology is defined using the Named Symbology Manager. However, the named symbology definitions are then associated with styles defined using the Style Manager. It is the style that is associated with the element. Both the named symbology and style definitions are stored in the .xin preference file.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

ReviewTask

ReviewTask

Time Allocated

15 Minutes

What Is a Review Task

Review Tasks are challenging exercises designed to reinforce the concepts taught in this and previous exercises and to provide you with an evaluation of your ability to understand the concepts. The tasks do not provide step‐by‐step instructions. Instead, they require you to draw on your new knowledge to solve problems.

Not all students will finish the tasks in the time allowed. If you are not able to complete a task you should review the previous practice exercises to reinforce the concepts and then attempt the task again. As time permits you may be able to do this during class, or you can continue your studies after the conclusion of the class.

Completion of this task is not required to move on to the next module in the training. The exercises in the next chapter are not dependent on completing this task.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

ReviewTask

Task Objective

Display the existing ground contours and design surface features.

Source Data

Exercise: Load the source data for this task.

1 Close any open data files.

2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Surfaces\Task\Meadow Park Working.dgn file.

The Project data files are listed below:

Preference File:C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamen‐tals\_Standards\Bentley Training.xin

Design: Meadow Park Proposed.dtm

Existing Ground:C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamen‐tals\_Common References\Meadow Park Existing.dtm



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

ReviewTask

Requirements

Exercise: Review the Existing and Proposed surfaces.

• Open the existing ground and proposed design surfaces.

• Display the contours of the existing ground surface using the Existing Surface preference.

• Re‐display the contours of the existing ground surface using an Interval of 5’ [1.5M].

• Display the features of the proposed design surface.

• Use the MicroStation View Attributes dialog to disable the Fill option. (Settings > View Attributes)

Questions

• What are the highest and lowest elevations of the Existing Ground Surface?

• How many breakline points are in the Design Surface?

Cleanup

Select File > Close > Close All to close all open InRoads files to prepare for the next lesson. When prompted to confirm closing the files, click Yes.

When finished exit the CAD software.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

ReviewTask



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Introduction to Geometry

In this chapter, we will learn about the basic concepts of Geometry. We will learn about the structure of the Geometry Project file. We will import a horizontal alignment from graphics and set the starting station for the alignment. We will display the horizontal alignment stationing and annotate the alignment.

Dec‐2011 Introduction to Geometry


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Where Are We in the Big Picture?


At this point in the project we have done the following:

• Set up the CAD file

• Set up project defaults

• Analyzed the existing data

Now, we are ready to create geometries which will involve the following tasks:

• Create horizontal geometry.

• Create existing ground profiles and cross sections.

• Create vertical geometry.

Introduction to Geometry Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn about Geometry Projects.

• Learn how to display geometry.

• Create horizontal alignments from graphics.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Geometry\Practice\.

2 Select the file Import Alignment Graphic.dgn, then click Open.


1 Select the Preferences tab in the InRoads Explorer.

2 Verify that the preference file Bentley Training.xin is in the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Standards\ folder.

The preference file should have automatically opened because of the Project Defaults previously set up. If so, skip the following steps and continue to the next topic (“What is a Geometry Project?”).

If the file is not loaded, complete the following steps.


4 Change the Files of type to Preferences (*.xin).

5 Browse to theC:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Standards\ folder.

6 Select the file Bentley Training.xin and click Open.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

What is a Geometry Project?

What is a Geometry Project?

Geometry Project

The Geometry Project contains geometry elements, which include coordinate geometry points, horizontal alignments, and vertical alignments. The file extension for the Geometry Project is .alg.

In addition to the geometry elements, the Geometry Project also stores stationing information for the alignments including the starting station and station equations, as well as important points along the alignment known as Event Points.

Event Points are a method of locating important locations along an alignment. These points are either based on a station and offset or on fixed coordinates. The station and offset method allows the point to move as the alignment definition is changed. Fixed coordinate event points do not move when the alignment is changed.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Geometry Project Structure



A Geometry Project is similar in concept to a database. It stores and organizes point information. There may be several Geometry Projects opened in InRoads, but only one can receive input at a time. This is called the “active” Geometry Project.

A geometry project is organized into hierarchal categories starting with the COGO point buffer and horizontal alignments. Only one alignment can be manipulated within a Geometry Project at a time. This is called the “active” alignment.

Vertical Alignments, and Horizontal Alignment Event Points, are stored as “children” of the horizontal alignments. Vertical event points are children to vertical alignments.

As shown in the diagram above, multiple horizontal alignments can exist in a Geometry Project. Each horizontal alignment can have multiple child vertical alignments. Each horizontal alignment must have a unique name. Geometry names are case‐sensitive.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Opening Files

Opening Files

Opening a Geometry Project ‐ Review

To open a geometry project, select File > Open. More than one Geometry Project can be “loaded” at a time. When you select the Geometry tab located in the bottom of the Workspace Bar, the name of the geometry project is visible in the InRoads Explorer.

Active Geometry

Like surfaces, the active Geometry Project is indicated by a red rectangle around the icon. This concept is extended to the horizontal and vertical alignments contained in the geometry project. You can only have one active horizontal alignment and one active vertical alignment at a time. Although you can view more than one alignment at a time, the active horizontal and vertical alignments are the only ones that can be edited. Some InRoads tools only work on the active alignment, while others allow you to select the active alignment in the tool dialog box.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

What is a Horizontal Alignment?

What is a Horizontal Alignment?

Horizontal Alignments

A horizontal alignment is a series of linear elements and circular elements. Together, the elements form an alignment. A horizontal alignment is used to define things such as a road centerline, a right‐of‐way line, and property boundaries. Horizontal alignments are stored in the Geometry Project.

A horizontal alignment is a child of the Geometry project. Each Geometry Project can have one or many horizontal alignments. The name of each horizontal alignment within a Geometry Project must be unique.

Alignments can be stationed. When a horizontal alignment is created, stationing is automatically assigned. The stationing starts at 0+00, but it can be changed to any starting station. We will see how stationing is defined for an alignment later in this chapter.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Types of Geometry

Types of Geometry

Types of Geometry

Geometry Projects and alignment are created using the File > New command. To create geometry, select the Geometry tab. This command allocates memory for a new geometry project or alignment. You must create a Geometry Project, followed by creating a Horizontal Alignment before you can create geometry data.

The first option on the dialog box defines the type of geometry name being created. The options include a Geometry Project, Horizontal Alignment, and Vertical Alignment.

There is a “parent‐child” relationship between Geometry Projects, Horizontal Alignments, and Vertical Alignments. When a horizontal alignment is created, it becomes a child of the active geometry project. Likewise, a new vertical alignment becomes a child of the active horizontal alignment.

Entering a description for the Geometry Project or alignment is recommended. It will help you identify which file to use, as you might have several files loaded at one time.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Types of Geometry

When creating horizontal and vertical alignments, the Style and Curve Definition dialog box fields are activated. The style defines how the geometry will appear when displayed in the CAD file. The curve definition defines how the horizontal or vertical curves are defined mathematically.

There are many ways to create and edit a horizontal alignment. We will cover some of the most commonly used methods in this course. In this lesson, we will create a horizontal alignment from a graphic element in the CAD file. In a later lesson, we learn to create and edit horizontal alignments using horizontal PI’s and curves. There is also an optional lesson that introduces you to creating geometry elements.

Geometry is created from graphic elements using the File > Import > Geometry command.

The types of geometry that can be created by importing geometry from graphics include:

• Horizontal Alignment

• Vertical Alignment

• Horizontal and Vertical Alignment

• COGO Points

• Event Points



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Types of Graphics That Can Be Imported

Types of Graphics That Can Be Imported

Type of Graphics That Can Be Imported

The types of graphic elements that can be imported are:

• Lines

• Linestrings

• Arcs

• Curve strings (stroked using chord height tolerance)

• Shapes

• Complex linestrings

• Complex shapes made from elements in this list

• B‐Splines (stroked using chord height tolerance)

The graphical element types listed above can be used for horizontal and vertical alignments.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Alignment Integrity

Alignment Integrity

Alignment Integrity

If possible, it is best to connect the alignment graphics into a single element, such as a complex chain, before importing. This ensures that all the lines and curves get imported into a single horizontal alignment and that the elements are continuous. InRoads can import separate graphic elements and combine them into a single alignment; however, creating a complex chain accomplishes the same results.

If you are importing an alignment containing non‐tangential circular arcs and the alignment was created from graphics, you may encounter restrictions if you try to edit the alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Import Alignment from Graphics


Create a New Geometry Project

1 Select File > New.

2 Click the Geometry tab.

3 Enter Hemfield for the Geometry Project name.

4 For the Description, enter Hemfield Road.


A new Geometry Project is created.

Import the Horizontal Alignment From Graphics

Now that a Geometry Project has been created, the new horizontal alignment will be created in this Geometry Project. The graphic element being importing is a complex chain.

1 Select File > Import > Geometry.

2 Ensure that the From Graphics tab is selected.

3 Ensure that the Type is set to Horizontal Alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


4 Enter Hemfield Rd for the Name and Hemfield Road Existing Alignment for the Description.

5 Select E_Road_PavementCL for the Style.

6 Click Apply.

7 Select the yellow element on the left in the view.

You can select anywhere on the graphic; the resulting alignment will be the same. InRoads reads the graphic in the direction it was originally drawn.

8 Click again on the CAD view to accept the highlighted graphic.

9 Right‐click to exit the graphic selection mode.

The new alignment is created.

Review the Horizontal Alignment

1 Select Geometry > Review Horizontal.

2 Review the alignment.

Notice that the starting station is 0+00[0+000].

3 Close the Review Horizontal dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



Stationing

The first time you create a horizontal alignment, the beginning station is 0+00[0+000]. You can assign a different beginning station using the stationing tool (Geometry > Horizontal Curve Set > Stationing). This stationing command defines the active alignment’s starting station. All alignment station equations can be created using this tool.

Review Horizontal Alignment

It is helpful to review your design geometrically. A quick way to review the alignment is to right‐click on the horizontal alignment in the InRoads Explorer and select Review. This command displays detailed information about the horizontal alignment. The alignment report can be printed, saved or displayed in the CAD file.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Save Geometry Project

InRoads doesn’t automatically save additions or modifications to the Geometry Project file. Any changes are stored in virtual memory and are not written to the hard disk until the File > Save As command is used.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Define Stationing


Define the Beginning Station

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Curve Set > Stationing.

Ensure that Hemfield Rd is selected from the Horizontal Alignment list.

By default, the active horizontal alignment is selected.

2 Enter 10+00 [1+000] for the Starting Station.


Review the Horizontal Alignment

1 Select Geometry > Review Horizontal (or right‐click on the horizontal alignment in the InRoads Explorer window and select Review).

The alignment report appears.

2 Select Element as the Mode.

Notice that the first graphic element is highlighted in the CAD view and the report is limited to that single element.

3 Click Next to step through each element in the alignment.

4 When finished, close the Review Horizontal Alignment dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Save the Geometry Project

1 Select File > Save As.

2 Select Geometry Projects (*.alg) from the Save as Type field.

3 Navigate to the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Geometry\Practice\ folder.

4 Enter Hemfield.alg as the File Name.

5 Click Save, then click Cancel.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Horizontal Alignment Annotation


View Stationing

Horizontal alignment stationing is displayed in the CAD file using the Geometry > View Geometry > Stationing tool. This tool controls the display of station annotation text along the active horizontal alignment. Stations are placed along a horizontal alignment at a specified interval.


The Geometry > View Geometry > Horizontal Annotation command is used to annotate a horizontal alignment with curve and tangent data. This command is also used to view and annotate COGO points.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Active Geometry Project/Horizontal Alignment ‐ Review

Remember, you can open or create several Geometry Projects. Only one Geometry Project can be worked on at a time. This is called the “active” Geometry Project. In the InRoads Explorer, the active Geometry Project is shown with a red box surrounding the icons. Numerous horizontal and vertical alignments can be created in a single Geometry Project. Just like Geometry Projects, only one horizontal and vertical alignment can be active at a time. The active alignments are also shown with a red box surrounding the icons.

Rename Geometry

The Rename Geometry allows you to change the name of a geometry project and any of the “children” of a geometry project, such as the horizontal alignment and/or the vertical alignment name. The Rename Geometry command is also used to change the style of an alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Locate/Graphic Select Button

Locate/Graphic Select Button

The Target button or Graphic Select button is available on many dialogs. It allows you to graphically select the element or points from the CAD view to define the information from that portion of the dialog. For example, you could graphically pick two points to define the Maximum Length of the triangle leg.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ View Horizontal Annotation


Annotate the Horizontal Alignment

1 Select Geometry > View Geometry > Horizontal Annotation.

The View Horizontal Annotation dialog opens.

2 Click the Graphic Select button to the right of the Horizontal Alignments Include field.

3 Select the yellow element on the left in the CAD view.

The nearest alignment is found and highlighted.

4 Click anywhere in the CAD View to Accept the highlighted alignment.

The Hemfield Rd alignment is added to the horizontal alignment list in the View Horizontal Annotation dialog.


The alignment tangents and curves are annotated based on the Style associated with the alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


View the Stationing

1 Select Geometry > View Geometry > Stationing.

Notice that the active alignment, Hemfield Rd, appears in the Horizontal Alignment field.

If the correct alignment was not already active, it can be selected from the pick list.

2 Click Apply and click Close.

The stationing is displayed in the CAD drawing.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Geometry View Options



The View Geometry Options allow you to specify which type of annotation is automatically updated when geometry is modified. When selected, InRoads will automatically update the following annotation:

• Horizontal Elements

• Vertical Elements

• Closed Areas

• Stationing

• Curve Sets

• Vertical Change in Plan

• View Regression Points

If a specific type of annotation is not selected, annotation can be manually updated using the view annotation command.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


The appearance of the annotation is controlled by each Geometry > View command’s preferences by using the alignment’s style and view command preference. For example, you may have an alignment with a style called Design Centerline.

If you checked that you want to update the stationing, then you must save a View station preference called Design Centerline. If such a preference is defined, then InRoads displays and annotates the stationing based upon the settings for Design Centerline. InRoads does not look at the settings for View Stationing that are in memory. The preference must exist on disk or the software silently skips the stationing annotation.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create Another Alignment with a Different Style


Change the View Geometry Options

1 Select Geometry > View Geometry > Options.

2 Make sure all the geometry options are selected.


Import the Horizontal Alignment From Graphics

1 Select File > Import > Geometry.

2 Ensure that the From Graphics tab is selected.

3 Ensure that the Type is set to Horizontal Alignment.

4 Enter Road 2 for the Name and Road 2 for the Description.

5 Select P_COGO_MainCL for the Style.

6 Click Apply.

7 Select the red element on the right in the view.

You can select anywhere on the graphic; the resulting alignment will be the same. InRoads reads the graphic in the direction it was originally drawn.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


8 Click again anywhere on the CAD view to accept the highlighted graphic.

The new alignment is created.

9 Right‐click to exit the graphic selection mode.

10 Close the Import Geometry dialog.

View the Stationing and Annotation

1 Delete the red element on the right.

2 In the InRoads Explorer, right‐click on the Road 2 alignment, and select View.

Notice that the Stationing and Annotation are displayed automatically in the CAD view.

3 Select Geometry > View Geometry > Stationing.

4 Click Preferences.

Notice that a preference exists called P_COGO_MainCL, which is the same name as the alignment style for Road 2. The stationing and annotation text will also automatically update when the alignment is modified.

5 Close the Preference dialog and the View Stationing dialog.

Change the style for the Hemfield Road Alignment

1 Select Geometry > Rename Geometry.

2 Set the Type to Horizontal Alignment.

3 In the From area set the Geometry Project to Hemfield.

4 In the alignment list in the center of the dialog, select Hemfield Rd.

5 In the To area, change the Style to P_COGO_MainCL.

6 Click Apply.

An Alert will display confirming you want to change the geometry.

7 Click Yes.

8 Click Close.

9 On the left side of the InRoads Explorer, right‐click on the Hemfield Rd Alignment and select View All Horizontals. The alignment updates with the new style and annotation.

Delete the Road 2 Alignment

1 On right side of the InRoads Explorer, right‐click on the Road 2 alignment and select Delete.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


2 An alert box will display. Click Yes.

3 Save the Geometry Project by selecting File > Save > Geometry Project.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

The Project File

The Project File

The Project file (.rwk) is used to open and save multiple InRoads data files in a single operation. Using a Project file is very helpful because an entire project can be loaded or saved in a single operation. Without the use of Project files, loading or saving a project involves keeping track of many individual files.

Before a Project file is created, the individual InRoads data files (Surfaces, Geometry Projects, Template Libraries, etc.) must be opened or created and saved to the disk. The Project file is a list of the individual InRoads data files to load and save. The Project file itself does not contain any InRoads data. It is an ASCII file that points to the location of the InRoads files.

To create an InRoads Project file, select File > Save As from the InRoads menu. This will bring up the Save As dialog. On the Save As dialog, select Options. This brings up the Project options dialog. The Project Options dialog is used to select which InRoads data files to add to the Project file.

The available InRoads data types are separated by tabs. All currently loaded InRoads data files are listed when a tab is selected. To include an InRoads data file in the Project file, select the Add and/or Update box next to the desired InRoads



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

The Project File

data file. The Add option indicates that the Project file will open the file. The Update option indicates that the Project file will save the file.

To open an existing Project file (*.rwk), select the File > Open command and select Project as the Files of Type. Browse and select the Project file (.rwk) and click OK. This will open all InRoads files listed in the Project file.

To save all data files in a Project file, select the File > Save > Project command. This will save the actual InRoads data files when the Update option is selected.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create a Project File

Exercise ‐ Create a Project File

Create a Project File


2 Set Save as Type to Projects (*.rwk).

3 Click Options.

By default, the Project Options dialog opens to the Surfaces tab.

4 Select the Geometry Project tab.

5 Select the Add and Update options next to the Geometry Project named Hemfield and click OK.

6 Navigate to the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Geometry\Practice\ folder.

7 Enter Practice‐Intro to Geometry.rwk as the File Name.

8 Click Save and then Cancel.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Understand and use Geometry Projects.

• Display geometry.

• Create horizontal alignments from graphics.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 The file extension for an InRoads Geometry Project is:

A – .xin

B – .alg

C – .dtm

D – .rwk

2 True or False: An alignment name must be defined before any alignment elements or points can be defined.

• True

• False

3 The first time you create a horizontal alignment, the beginning station is ____.

A – 0+00 [0+000]

B – 10+00 [1+000]

C – 20+00 [2+000]

D – 12+23 [1+223]

4 True or False: The Project file (.rwk) is used to open and save multiple InRoads data files in a single operation.

• True

• False



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 The file extension for an InRoads Geometry Project is.

B – .alg

2 True or False: An alignment name must be defined before any alignment elements or points can be defined.

True ‐ You must create an alignment name before any geometry elements can be defined. The geometry name is created in the active geometry project but it is not saved to the hard drive automatically. You must save the geometry project using the File > Save As command.

3 The first time you create a horizontal alignment, the starting station is ____.

A – 0+00 [0+000] All horizontal alignments begin at station 0+00 [0+000] by default. The starting station can be changed with the Geometry > Horizontal Curve Set > Stationing tool.

4 True or False: The Project file (.rwk) is used to open and save multiple InRoads data files in a single operation.

True ‐ The Project file (.rwk) is a convenient method of opening and saving multiple data files in a single operation. The Project file is created with the File > Save As command.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

15 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Import the Meadow Park Drive existing horizontal alignment from graphics. Annotate the Meadow Park Drive alignment.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Geometry\Task\Meadow Park Working.dgn file.

3 Load the Project file.

C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Geometry\Task\Task ‐ Intro to Geometry.rwk.

The Project file opens the files listed below.

Preference File:C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Standards\Bentley Training.xin

Existing Ground:C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Common References\Meadow Park Existing.dtm



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Import Geometry from graphics.

• Create a new Geometry Project named Meadow Park.

• Import the red complex chain that represents the centerline of the road as a horizontal alignment named Meadow Park Drive. Use P_COGO_MainCL as the Style.

• Set the beginning station of Meadow Park Drive to 15+51.15 [1+551.15].

• Display the horizontal alignment, stationing, and annotation.

• When finished, save the new Geometry Project as C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Geometry\Task\Meadow Park.alg.

• Add the new Meadow Park.alg to the project file Task ‐ Intro to Geometry.rwk. Select the Add and Update options for the newly created Geometry Project. When asked if you wish to overwrite the existing file, click Yes.

Questions

• What is the ending station of the alignment?

• What is the PI Station of the curve?

• What is the curve Radius?

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Meadow Park Drive ‐ Alignment

Meadow Park Drive ‐ Alignment



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Creating Horizontal Alignments Using PI’s

In this chapter, we will learn how to create horizontal alignment using the “PI” commands (Add, Insert, Move, Delete PI). We will also learn how to edit existing alignments and create curves.

Using the “PI” commands is one of a number of ways to create alignments. If your normal working practice does not use this method, you should skip this chapter. However, once this training course is ended, you will have this document and the dataset, so you will be able to work through the content of this chapter at a later date.

Dec‐2011 Creating Horizontal Alignments Using PI’s


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn how to define horizontal points of intersection (PIs) with precision input.

• Learn how to edit horizontal alignments.

• Learn how to create horizontal curves.

Creating Horizontal Alignments Using PI’s Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Creating HA Using PIs\Practice\.

2 Select the file Add PI’s.dgn, then click Open.

3 Open the CAD file key‐in window (Utilities > Key‐in).

Open the Project File


The Open dialog opens.

2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Creating HA Using PIs\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ HA PI.rwk, then click Open.


5 Verify that the following files were opened:


Geometry Project: Hemfield.alg



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Horizontal Curve Set



The Horizontal Curve Set tools are used to place and edit PIs and curves that define a horizontal alignment. The alignment definition must be created using File > New before PI’s can be added to the alignment. You add PI’s to an alignment using the Add PI command. This builds the tangent sections. Next, you must move, insert, or delete points to edit the points that were placed with the Add PI command. Finally, use the Define Curves command to create and edit the curves.

There are four tools for creating and manipulating PI’s:

• Add PI – creates a new PI in the active alignment. If the alignment already contains one or more PI’s, the Add PI tool will add a new PI at the beginning or the end of the active alignment.

When you invoke this tool, you will be prompted to identify the end of the alignment. If your existing alignment is empty, the first data point will become the beginning of your alignment. Otherwise, the first data point identifies the nearest end of the active alignment. Make sure you have the correct active horizontal alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


• Insert PI – creates a new PI between two existing PI’s in the active horizontal alignment.

• Move PI – repositions a PI and its associated curve set, if one exists.

• Delete PI – removes a PI and its associated curve set, if one exists.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Productivity Tips

Productivity Tips

Precision Input and Conventions

To place PI’s using precision input, select Utilities > Key‐in from the CAD menu. There are no spaces used in the precision input format.

The format of the key‐ins are shown below:

• ne=northing,easting,elevation

The elevation parameter is optional.

• di=distance,direction

The format of the direction as a bearing is N45^36’30.7”E or decimal N45.52E

• so=station,offset,elevation,alignment name, Geometry Project name

Offsets to the right of the ahead stationing are positive. Offsets to the left of the ahead stationing are negative.

The elevation, alignment name, and Geometry Project name are optional parameters; however, they must be included in the specified order. Therefore, if you wish to include the alignment name, the elevation must also be included. Alignment names are case sensitive.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Productivity Tips

Status Bar

The left corner of the CAD status bar will display InRoads command prompts. These prompts will assist you when using InRoads commands which require you to click in the CAD View or enter information into the CAD Key‐in dialog.

The Angle Mode may need to be changed to Bearings for the di‐keyin to function as expected.

To change the Angle Mode:

Settings > Design File > Angle Readout > Direction Mode



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create Alignment with Precision


Add Horizontal PI’s

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Curve Set > Add PI.

2 When prompted to identify the end of the alignment, data point near the lower end of the red element in the CAD file.

3 Move the cursor.

4 You should see a line stretching from the end of the alignment.

The next points will be entered using precision input key‐ins.

5 Click in the key‐in field to make it active.

6 In the CAD Key‐in dialog, enter ne=120126.674,1089335.314 [36609.524,332088.135.].

7 Press Enter.

The PI is placed.

Next, we will place another PI by using the di key‐in.

8 In the CAD Key‐in dialog, enter di=1145.0 [267.02],s78^26’24”e.

Shift 6 will enter the ^ symbol.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


9 Press Enter.

The next two PI’s will be added by graphically selecting the points.

10 Snap to and accept a data point at the south end of the purple line to place a PI. This point is northeast of the last point placed. If AccuSnap is enabled, you must hold down the Shift+Ctrl keys to snap.

11 Data point anyplace east of the alignment to place the last PI point.

12 Right‐click to reset the command.

13 Right‐click again to terminate the Add PI command.

If necessary, you can use the CAD view control command tools in the middle of using the Place PI command. When you are done with the view manipulation, right‐click and InRoads will bring you back to the last step prior to your view manipulation.

Insert a Horizontal PI

The Insert PI tool is used to add a new PI to an existing tangent line. Remember, the Add PI tool can only be used to add a PI on the end of an existing alignment.

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Curve Set > Insert PI.

2 Graphically select the last segment of the alignment.

The segment becomes dynamic showing the possible locations of the new PI.

3 Click to locate the point just north of the existing segment.

Precision key‐ins could have been used to locate the inserted PI.

4 Click again to accept the overall solution.

5 Right‐click to terminate the Insert PI command.

Move a Horizontal PI

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Curve Set > Move PI.

2 Graphically select the last PI in the alignment.

3 Move the PI to a new location (the exact location is not important).

4 Click to locate the PI.

Precision key‐ins could also have been used to locate the PI.


6 Right‐click to terminate the Move PI command.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Delete a Horizontal PI

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Curve Set > Delete PI.

2 Graphically select the last PI in the alignment.


4 Repeat the procedure to again remove the last PI in the alignment. This is the PI that was second to last in the original alignment.

5 Right‐click to terminate the Delete PI command.

6 Select File > Save > Geometry Project.

Remember, InRoads does not automatically save the Geometry Project changes to the hard disk; they are only stored in virtual memory at this time. It is always a good idea to save the geometry, or any other InRoads data, after making changes.

Another way to save InRoads data is to right‐click on the data type in the InRoads Explorer and click Save. In this case, highlight the Hemfield Geometry Project in the InRoads Explorer, right‐click and click Save.

In previous chapters you used the Save As command to save geometry and other data. However, in this exercise you loaded and are working with an existing geometry project (.alg). Because InRoads already knows the name and location of the geometry project on the hard disk, you can use the Save command, which will overwrite the existing file with the current data in InRoads.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Practice Alignment

Review Practice Alignment

The horizontal alignment in the previous exercise should resemble the figure above when complete.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Horizontal Curves

Horizontal Curves

Horizontal Curves

The Define Horizontal Curve Set tool defines new curve sets and modifies existing curve sets in the active horizontal alignment. The accepted solution is displayed in the CAD drawing file. There are numerous options on this dialog box; however, a few basic options will get you started.

Horizontal PI Area

The text fields in the Horizontal PI group box describe the position of the current PI relative to the previous and next PIs. Changing values on this dialog will redefine the location of the PI. The Defined By option determines how PI locations are determined.

For example, assume that Define By is set to Directions from Previous and Next PIs, and that you have modified the values of Direction Back and Direction Ahead. When you click Apply, the PI is repositioned based on the intersection of those directions projected from the previous PI to the next PI.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Horizontal Curves

Horizontal Curve Area

This is the most important area on the dialog box. These settings define the curve or curve set that is created at the current PI. A curve set can be a simple single curve, a complex spiral‐curve‐spiral‐curve‐spiral curve combination, or anything in‐between. To omit a curve or spiral definition in the curve set, leave its length or radius value set to zero.

A degree of curvature can be entered in the radius field by proceeding the value with the letter d. For example, keying in d1 returns a radius of 5729.578, which is the radius of a 1 degree curve.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Define Horizontal Curves


Now that we have extended our alignment, the appropriate next step is to define curves for those PIs that have been placed.

Define Horizontal Curve

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Curve Set > Define Curve.

2 Click Next until you locate the first PI with no curve.

Watch the Radius field to determine if each PI has a curve assigned. The active curve and/or tangent segments are highlighted in the CAD drawing.

If you know exactly which PI you want to edit, the Select button can be used to graphically select the PI.

3 Enter 100 [40] for the length of the leading transition clothoid spiral.

4 Enter 1200 [400] for Radius 1.

5 Enter 100 [40] for the length of the trailing transition clothoid spiral.

6 Click Apply and then Close.

The curve solution is displayed in the CAD file. Did the curve get created?

7 Read the prompt in the InRoads Explorer.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Correct the Curve

1 Change the Radius 1 to 500 [150].

Leave both transition lengths at 100.00 [40].

2 Click Apply.

What does the prompt say? Did the curve get created?

3 Click Undo on the Define Horizontal Curve Set dialog box.

You can only undo the last curve you define. What happens?

4 Change the Radius 1 to 700 [200].

5 Click Apply, then click Next.

Be sure to click next so the correct curve will be modified.


7 Click Apply, then click Next.


9 Click Apply.

10 Close the dialog.

Review and Annotate the Alignment

1 Right‐click on the horizontal alignment (in the InRoads Explorer Window) and select Review.

2 Close the Review Horizontal Alignment dialog.

3 Select Geometry > View Geometry > Horizontal Annotation tool to annotate the horizontal alignment.

4 Click the target button next to the Horizontal Alignments Include field.

5 Click on the alignment graphic.

The alignment highlights.

6 Click again to accept the alignment.

7 Click Apply to annotate the alignment.

8 Close the View Horizontal Annotation dialog.

Save Geometry




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Design Criteria

Design Criteria

Add Horizontal PI

The Add Horizontal PI command can place PI’s and define curves based on the design criteria specified in the Design Criteria dialog. Access Horizontal Design Criteria from Geometry > Horizontal Curve Set > Design Criteria. Access Vertical Design Criteria by selecting Geometry > Vertical Curve Set > Design Criteria. Browse to the appropriate horizontal curve checks table. This will allow you to automatically place PI’s with curves defined using the Add PI command.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Define Horizontal Curves Based on Design Criteria


Specify Design Criteria

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Curve Set > Design Criteria.

2 Select the Use Design Criteria check box.

3 If table name field is empty, click Browse.

4 Navigate to the C:\Program Files\Bentley\InRoads Group V8.11\data\imperial [metric]\ folder and select Horizontal Design Checks.txt.

If your InRoads software is not installed to the default location, the path in step 3 will be different. Browse to the location where your software is installed.

5 Select 55 [80] for the Speed and set the Maximum e to 6.

6 Click Apply, then Close.

Add PI’s with Curves.

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Curve Set > Add PI.

2 Select the last PI in the alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


3 Click down and to the right of the last PI. Notice a curve is automatically defined based on the design criteria specified.

4 Place one more PI up and to the right, then right‐click to finish.


6 When prompted to save the geometry project, click No.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Define horizontal points of intersection (PIs) with precision input.

• Edit horizontal alignments.

• Create horizontal curves.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 Which of the following command(s) can be used to define a horizontal PI?

A – Add PI

B – Delete PI

C – Insert PI

D – Move PI

2 List at least two key‐in commands used to enter horizontal geometry with precision.

1 – __________

2 – __________

3 – __________

3 True or False: The Define Horizontal Curve Set tool defines new curve sets but will not allow for the modification of existing curve sets in the active horizontal alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 Which of the following command(s) can be used to define a horizontal PI.

A – Add PI

C – Insert PI

Both the Add PI and Insert PI commands are used to define a new PI. The Add PI command is used to start a new alignment or add a PI to either end of an existing alignment. The Insert PI command is used to define a new PI in the middle of an existing alignment.

2 List three key‐in commands used to enter horizontal geometry with precision.

1 – ne=northing,easting,elevation

2 – di=distance,direction

3 – so=station,offset,elevation,alignment name,Geometry Project name

3 True or False: The Define Horizontal Curve Set tool defines new curve sets but will not allow for the modification of existing curve sets in the active horizontal alignment.

False ‐ The Define Horizontal Curve Set tool defines new curve sets and modifies existing curve sets in the active horizontal alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

30 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Extend the existing Meadow Park Drive horizontal alignment to connect to a known coordinate.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Creating HA Using PIs\Task\Meadow Park Working.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Creating HA Using PIs\Task\Task ‐ HA PI.rwk.



Geometry Project: Meadow Park.alg




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Extend the existing Meadow Park Drive horizontal alignment.

• The existing Meadow Park Drive alignment currently ends at N149236.796, E1088363.612 [N45487.466, E331733.892].

• The extended alignment should begin with a tangent that has the same bearing as the last tangent of the existing alignment.

• The first new PI is 374.76 [114.23M] feet from the end of the existing alignment.

• The second new PI is 386.12 [117.69M] feet and is S65^48’21.5”E from the first new PI.

• The second to the last PI of the extended alignment is 350 [106.68M] feet from where the alignment intersects Brown Way. Hint – Use the Define By method of Direction and Distance from Next PI to assist in placing this PI.

• The last tangent of the extended alignment should intersect Brown Way at a 90 degree. Hint – draw a line perpendicular to brown way about 350' in length (it does not have to be exact). When constructing the last part of the alignment, you can snap to the perpendicular line that was previously drawn.

• The eastern most point on the alignment where it ties into Brown Way south of the cul‐de‐sac is N149198.65, E1089850.38 [N45470.037,E332187.029].

• This portion of the alignment must have a minimum of 3 curves.

• All of the curves should have a Degree of Curvature (DOC) of 11[35] degrees (radius of 520.87 feet [159.15M]).

• The complete alignment should be displayed, stationed, and annotated in the CAD file.

• Once complete, save the Geometry Project.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Questions

• What is the bearing of the second tangent in your final geometry?

• What is the last station on the alignment?

• What is the tangent length of the last tangent in your final geometry?

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Meadow Park Drive ‐ Known Alignment Points

Meadow Park Drive ‐ Known Alignment Points



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Meadow Park Drive ‐ Example Completed Alignment




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Creating Horizontal Alignments Using Elements

During this lesson you will learn to create a Horizontal Alignment using Elements.

Creating an alignment using Elements is one of a number of ways to create alignments. If your normal working practice does not use this method, you should skip this chapter. However, once this training course is ended, you will have this document and the dataset so will be able to work through the content of this chapter at a later date.

Dec‐2011 Creating Horizontal Alignments Using Elements


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Create horizontal elements.

• Edit horizontal elements.

• Check alignment integrity.

Creating Horizontal Alignments Using Elements Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Create HA Using Elements\Practice\.

2 Select the file HA Elements.dgn, then click Open.





2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Create HA Using Elements\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ HA Elements.rwk, then click Open.




Existing Surface: Existing Ground.dtm



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Horizontal Elements

Horizontal Elements

What Are Horizontal Elements?

Horizontal elements are Geometry elements that are defined using Fixed, Float and Free parameters. They are more flexible than using the PI method, as they allow for parts of the alignment to contain discontinuities and gaps. They also enable the user to design parts of the alignment with constraints, while still having free elements where needed. Because there can be gaps in an alignment defined with elements, you can design the project by first establishing the straights and curves in the most constrained areas and then completing the rest of the alignment later by filling in the gaps.

Horizontal alignments defined using Elements are generally best suited to:

• Final design or reconstruction

• Brown field design

• Design in a restricted corridor



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Horizontal Elements

Horizontal Element Tools

The horizontal element tools are found on the Geometry > Horizontal Element menu.

The horizontal element tools can be activated and de‐activated using Application Add‐Ins. If the Horizontal Element tools are not on your Geometry menu, select Tools > Application Add‐Ins. From the list of available add‐ins, select the check box next to the Horizontal and Vertical Element Add‐in and click OK.

These commands are used to modify horizontal alignments by adding, copying, editing, and deleting individual elements.

• Add Fixed/Floating/Free Horizontal Line – places a linear horizontal element.

• Add Fixed/Floating/Free Horizontal Curve – places a horizontal curve element.

• Define Spiral – ties two existing curves or tangents together with a Clothoid, RIC Cubic Parabola, Bi‐quadratic Parabola, Bloss, Sinusoid, or Cosine spiral curve.

• Connect Elements – moves one element and connects it to a second element.

• Cut Element – cuts an existing horizontal element into two pieces.

• Join Elements – joins two coincident, colinear elements to form a single new element.

• Move Elements – moves an existing horizontal element to a specified location.

• Copy Elements – copies a part of an existing alignment into the active alignment.

• Add Fixed Element – places a fixed element based on two parameters. The parameters include beginning coordinates, ending coordinates, length, and delta angle. Clothoid spirals can be placed by defining different beginning and ending radii. No other spiral types can be placed.

• Edit Element – edits an existing horizontal element.

• Delete Element – deletes a selected horizontal element from the active horizontal alignment.

• Check Integrity – identifies geometric integrity, reorders elements, fixes transpositions and deletes extraneous elements.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Horizontal Elements

Simplified Horizontal Element Tools

Simplified Horizontal and Vertical Elements are tools that are used to create geometry elements with predefined settings in the active horizontal and/or vertical alignment. When using these commands, no dialog boxes appear when using the simplified horizontal and vertical elements because the settings used are already specified and can be changed by selecting Geometry > Simplified Horizontal Element > Settings.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Productivity Tips

Productivity Tips

The format of the direction as a bearing is N45^36’30.7”E or decimal N45.52E.

The Angle Mode may need to be changed to Bearings for the di‐keyin to function as expected.

To change the Angle Mode:

Settings > Design File > Angle Readout > Direction Mode

When an offset or radius is required the sign of the value defines the direction relative to the alignment. A positive value defines an offset or curve to the right when looking up‐station. A negative value defines an offset or curve to the left.

Status Bar

The left corner of the status bar will display InRoads command prompts. These prompts will assist you when using InRoads commands which require you to click in a CAD View or enter information into the CAD Key‐in dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Fixed Horizontal Elements


Add Fixed Line

Creates a fully constrained linear element in the active alignment.

There are two modes for this command. You can place a linear horizontal element between two points. The points can be data points or can be specified as Northing and Easting pairs in the dialog box. Or you can place a linear horizontal element by Point, Direction, and Distance.

Add Fixed Curve

Creates a fully constrained curve element in the active alignment.

There are two modes for this command. You can define a horizontal curve by two points (start and end) and a radius. The points can be data points or can be specified as Northing and Easting pairs in the dialog box. Or you can place a horizontal curve by 3 Points (start, end, and pass through).



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


When the Select Insertion Element check box is enabled, the new element is added before or after an existing element in the active alignment. The reference element is selected during the element placement. When the check box is cleared the new element is placed at the end of the alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Element Manipulation


Change Position Tools

Move Element – This tool changes the position of an existing element.

Connect Elements – This changes the position of an existing element but it does so by connecting the beginning of one element to the end of a second element. This tool ensures that the two elements share a common end point.

Copy Element – This tool copies one or more elements. You must identify the alignment the element is coming from, the first element in the alignment to be copied, and the last element to be copied. All elements between the first and last element are copied. If the same element is identified as the first and last element, that single element is copied.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Modify Element Tools

Cut Elements – divides the selected element into two elements.

Join Elements – joins two elements into a single element. The two elements must the same type (linear or curve), be connected, and be tangent to be joined.

Edit Element – is used to edit existing linear, circular, and spiral elements. The element that will be edited is highlighted in the CAD file. Use the Select, First, Previous, Next, and Last buttons to navigate to the element you want to edit. The start, stop, or both ends of the elements can be adjusted. Two important options for this tool control how connecting elements are or are not modified along with the modified element.

Maintain Element Connectivity – other elements are moved to maintain connectivity and colinear direction.

Maintain Element connectivity with Minimum Movement – the element just after the modified element is adjusted. The software attempts to minimize the overall movement of the alignment.

No Option Selected – only the edited element is adjusted. A discontinuity will exist between the edited element and the next element in the alignment.

Delete Element – is used to delete existing elements.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create New Geometry

Exercise ‐ Create New Geometry

Create a New Geometry Project


2 In the New dialog, select the Geometry tab.

3 Set the Type to Geometry Project.

4 Enter Route 1 Extension for the geometry project Name.

5 Click Apply.

Create a New Horizontal Alignment

6 In the New dialog, change the Type to Horizontal Alignment.

7 Enter Route 1 Extension for the alignment Name.

8 Set the Style to P_COGO_MainCL.

9 Click Apply.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Floating Horizontal Elements


Add Floating Line

Attaches a horizontal linear element onto an existing non‐linear element.

If you select the element near its start, the new line attaches to the start of the element. If you select the element on its end, the new line attaches to the end of the element.

There are two modes for this command. You can place a linear horizontal element by defining the endpoint or by fixing the direction and defining the endpoint.

Floating a line on the end of a curve will recompute the length of the end of the curve and use the data point as the end of the line.

Floating a line on the start of a curve will recompute the length of the start of the curve and use the data point as the start of the line.

After placement, the length of the curve to which you are attaching the line adjusts to maintain tangency and coincidence between the two elements.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Add Floating Curve

Attaches a horizontal curve element onto an existing linear element.

If you select the starting half of the existing element, the curve will be added to the starting side of the existing element. If you select the ending half of the existing element, the curve will be added to the ending side of the existing element.

There are two modes in this pull‐down menu. You can define the new horizontal curve by Point and Radius or by Point and Direction.

When you select this command, the system prompts you to select an element by placing a data point on the element. That point serves as the initial point for your curve however it does not fix that point as the tangent point between the line and the curve. As you move the cursor the curve floats along the line element. The location of the curve end point defines where the curve is placed which in turn defines where the tangent point is located. After placement, the line element to which you are attaching the curve adjusts to maintain tangency and coincidence between the two elements.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Free Horizontal Elements

Free Horizontal Elements

Add Free Line

Attaches a linear horizontal element between two existing non‐linear horizontal elements.

After placement, the elements to which you are attaching the line adjust to maintain tangency and coincidence between the elements.

Add Free Curve

Defines a curve between two existing horizontal elements. The curve can optional include leading and/or trailing transitions. The command prompts you to select the two elements by identifying each of them in graphics.

When you place the transitional element, the two elements connected by the transition are adjusted to maintain tangency and coincidence between the elements.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create Alignment using Horizontal Elements


Create Fixed Lines

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Element > Add Fixed Line.

2 In the Add Fixed Horizontal Line dialog box, make sure the Mode is set to By Two Points.

3 Click Apply.

4 Place the first point at location 1 and the second point about half way between locations 1 and 2.

5 Click to accept, then right mouse click.

6 Place another fixed line, with the first point about halfway between location 2 and 3 and the second point at location 3.

7 Click to accept, then right mouse click.

8 Right Mouse Click again to terminate the element placement.

9 Close the dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Your results should now appear similar to what is shown in the following illustration:

Create Curves

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Element > Add Free Curve.

2 Set the Radius to 1000 [300], then click Apply.

3 Select the first element on the left, then the second element on the right.

4 Click to accept.

5 Right‐click, then close the Add Free Horizontal Curve dialog.

6 Zoom out in the CAD view so that point 4 is visible.

7 Select Geometry > Horizontal Element > Add Floating Curve.

8 Ensure the Mode is set to By Point and Radius.

9 Enter ‐1000 [‐300] for the Radius, then click Apply.

The negative sign defines a curve to the left looking toward the end of the alignment. A positive sign defines a curve to the right.

10 Click Apply.

11 Select the last element in the alignment.

12 For the end of the curve, place a point midway between locations 3 and 4.

13 Click to accept.

14 Right‐click, then close the Add Floating Horizontal Curve dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Add Floating Line

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Element > Add Floating Line.

2 Ensure the Mode is set to By Point.

3 Click Apply.

4 Select the Last curve in the alignment.

5 Place the end point at location 4.

6 Click to accept.

7 Right‐click, then close the Add Floating Horizontal Line dialog.

Your results should look similar to the illustration below.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Precision Input

Precision Input

Whenever InRoads is expecting input in the CAD view by data clicking you can substitute the click with a precision input.

To use precision input, select Utilities > Key‐in from the CAD menu.

There are no spaces used in the precision input format.

The format of the key‐ins are shown below:

• ne=northing,easting [,elevation]

• di=distance,direction

The format of the direction as a bearing is N45^36’30.7”E or decimal N45.52E

• so=station,offset [,elevation] [,alignment name] [, Geometry Project name]

Offsets to the right of the ahead stationing are positive. Offsets to the left of the ahead stationing are negative.

The elevation, alignment name, and Geometry Project name are optional parameters; however, they must be included in the specified order. Therefore, if you wish to include the alignment name, the elevation must also be included. Alignment names are case sensitive.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create Alignment using Precision Keyins


Create a Horizontal Alignment with Precision

1 Create a new Horizontal Alignment named Right Turn Lane with the style P_COGO_Secondary_CL.

Hint: File > New.

2 Select Geometry > Horizontal Element > Add Fixed Line.

3 Select the Point 1 check box and select the Graphic Selection button next to the Northing and Easting fields.

4 In the CAD Key‐in dialog enter the following:

so=2600,12,0,Route 1 Extension [so=0800,3.6,0,Route 1 Extension]

The dialog displays with the coordinates for the first point. The coordinates are computed for a point 12 feet [3.6 meters] right of station 26+00 [800] on the Route 1 Extension alignment.

5 Select the Point 2 check box.

6 Select the Graphic Selection button next to the Northing and Easting fields.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



The dialog displays with the coordinates for the first point. The coordinates are computed for a point 12 feet [3.6 meters] right of station 29+00 [830] on the Route 1 Extension alignment.

8 Click Apply.

The first element displays. It is located on the right side of the existing alignment between points 2 and 3.

9 Click to Accept.

The dialog box re‐opens.

Create Ramp Taper

1 Select the graphic selection button next to the Point 1 Northing and Easting fields.



You can use the up arrow on your keyboard to display the previously entered key‐ins.




5 Click Apply.

The taper element displays.

6 Click to Accept.


Create Parallel Segment








DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



5 Click Apply.

The taper element displays.

6 Click to Accept.


7 Close the dialog.

Extend the Alignment by 50’ [10M]

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Element > Edit Element.

2 Make sure the type is set to Linear.

3 Click the Next> button on the lower right side of the dialog until the last element is highlighted.

4 At the bottom of the dialog, change the current length to 250 [60].

5 Click Apply, then close the dialog.

Save Geometry


2 Set the Save as type to Geometry Projects (*.alg).

3 Type Route 1 Extension in the File name field.

4 Browse to the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Create HA Using Elements\Practice\ folder if it is not already active.

5 Click Save.

6 Close the dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Check Integrity

Check Integrity

The Check Integrity tool is used to verify tangency and connectivity between the elements that make up a horizontal alignment. The Check Integrity tool can be used on any alignment no matter how it was created.

This command is designed to fix several types of issues that are inherent in the design/implementation of Horizontal and Vertical Element commands. These issues are results of allowing you the freedom to work on any part of the alignment. These freedoms can create discontinuities, non‐tangency, and transpositions.

To activate the tool, select Geometry > Horizontal Element > Check Integrity.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Check Alignment Integrity


Check the Integrity of the Alignment

1 Select Geometry > Horizontal Element > Check Integrity.

2 In the Check Integrity dialog, select the first element at the top of the list.

The first element in the alignment should highlight.

3 At the bottom of the dialog, click Next and review the other two elements in the alignment.

4 Right‐click on the last element and review the options in the pop‐up menu.

5 When finished, close the dialog.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Create horizontal elements

• Edit horizontal elements

• Check alignment integrity



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 Which of the following command(s) can be used to create a single linear element that is tangent to an existing curve?

A – Add Free Line

B – Add Fixed Line

C – Add Floating Line

D – Add Tangent Linear Command

2 Which of the following command(s) can be used to create a single curve in‐between two existing linear elements?

A – Add Free Curve

B – Add Fixed Curve

C – Add Floating Curve

D – Both B and C

3 Which of the following command(s) can be used to change the direction of a single linear element?

A – Inverse Direction

B – Check Integrity

C – There is no way to change the direction of a single linear element.

D – The Call Bentley Institute Command



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:


1 Which of the following command(s) can be used to create a single linear element that is tangent to an existing curve?

A – Add Free Line

B – Add Fixed Line

C – Add Floating Line

D – Add Tangent Linear Command

2 Which of the following command(s) can be used to create a single curve in between two existing linear elements?

A – Add Free Curve

B – Add Fixed Curve

C – Add Floating Curve

D – Both B and C

3 Which of the following command(s) can be used to change the direction of a single linear element?

A – Inverse Direction

B – Check Integrity

C – There is no way to change the direction of a single linear element.

D – The Call Bentley Institute Command



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

30 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Extend the existing Meadow Park Drive horizontal alignment to connect to a known coordinate.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Create HA Using Elements\Task\Meadow Park Working.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Create HA Using Elements\Task\Task ‐ HA Elements.rwk.







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Create a Horizontal Alignment using elements.

• The existing Meadow Park Drive alignment currently ends at N149236.796, E1088363.612 [N45487.466, E331733.892].

• The last element of the existing alignment should be extended by 300’.

• The eastern most point on the alignment where it ties into Brown Way south of the cul‐de‐sac is N149198.65, E1089850.38 [N45470.037,E332187.029].

• The last element in the alignment is perpendicular to Brown Way.

• This portion of the alignment must have a minimum of 3 curves.

• The curves should have a Degree of Curvature (DOC) of 11[35] degrees (radius of 520.87[159.15M] feet).

• The complete alignment should be displayed, stationed, and annotated in the CAD file.

• Once complete, save the Geometry Project.

Tips

• Use the Edit Element command to extend the last tangent of the existing alignment by 300' [95M].

• For the last element in the alignment (remember with these tools you can create elements in any order) Add a Fixed Line By Point, Direction and Distance. The point should be N149198.65, E1089850.38 N45470.037,E332187.029] and the direction should be perpendicular to Brown Way (use the illustration as a guide) Hint: You can also use the graphic selection to get the bearing of Brown Way, then add/subtract the appropriate angle to get the direction. Use a distance of about 310' [100M] (it does not need to be exact).

• If necessary, use the Check Integrity command to transpose the last element that ties into Brown Way.

• Finish the alignment Using Add Floating Line or Curve and Add Free Line or Curve. (Use the illustration as a guide.)

Questions

• What is the last station on the alignment?



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Horizontal Alignment Detail

Horizontal Alignment Detail



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Profiles and Cross Sections

In this chapter, you will learn how to create profiles and cross sections.

Dec‐2011 Profiles and Cross Sections


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn how to create profiles.

• Learn how to create cross sections.

Profiles and Cross Sections Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Profiles and Cross Sections\Practice\.

2 Select the file Profiles and Cross Sections.dgn, then click Open.





2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Profiles and Cross Sections\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ Profiles and Cross Sections.rwk, then click Open.




Existing Surface:C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Common References\Hemfield Existing.dtm




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Profiles

Profiles

Profiles

A profile is a series of elevations extracted along a baseline, which is normally a horizontal alignment. A profile is a graph of the horizontal alignment stationing versus the elevations of the surface. The alignment stationing is plotted along the bottom axis and the surface elevations are plotted along the vertical axis.

A profile is comprised of two parts, the profile window and the profile data. The profile window consists of the bottom, left and right axis, and grid lines. The profile data consists of surface lines and surface features. The profile data can also be updated with new surface data as it is obtained.

Vertical alignments can be displayed on the profile in addition to the surface.

Multiple plots of profile data representing different surfaces can be displayed in a single profile. Once a profile is created, vertical alignments can then be created and displayed.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Create Profile

Create Profile

Create Profile

The Create Profile command extracts elevation data from one or more surfaces and displays it along a linear path. The Create Profile command has settings that define how the profile appears. When working in a production environment, very few of these settings will need to be altered because they will already be defined in your project standards.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Create Profile

The Create Profile dialog box is organized with a tree and leaf interface. Below is a brief description of the setting that you may need to alter.

General Leaf

• Exaggeration – specifies the vertical to horizontal exaggeration for displayed profiles. Typically, the horizontal exaggeration should be left at 1.0 and the vertical adjusted for the desired exaggeration.

• Surfaces – allows you to select which surfaces to display in the profile. All surfaces currently loaded in InRoads are listed. You can select as many surfaces to be displayed in the profile if desired.

Source Leaf

• Alignment – specifies the name of the alignment the profile follows.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create Existing Ground Profile


View The Horizontal Alignment

1 Locate the alignment Hemfield Road in the InRoads Explorer.

2 Right‐click on Hemfield Road and select View.

View Surface

1 Select Surface > View Surface > Perimeter.

2 Ensure the Surface is set to Hemfield Existing.


Create Profile

1 Select Evaluation > Profile > Create Profile.

If you are using the Metric dataset, select the Preferences button and load the preference Default_Metric.

2 Click Apply and follow the prompt.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


3 Identify a location in the CAD drawing where the lower‐left corner of the profile is located (make sure you allow enough room for the whole profile window so it doesn’t overlap with other graphic elements).

4 Click Close.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Cross Sections

Cross Sections

Cross Sections

A cross section is a 2D graphic display of a planar section cut through one or more 3D surfaces. Cross Sections are extracted along a linear path, such as a horizontal alignment. They can be extracted at any angle relative to the linear path, but are typically perpendicular to the path.

The bottom axis shows the offset from the linear path. The vertical axis shows the elevations of the surfaces.

Like profiles, a cross section is comprised of two parts, the cross section window and the cross section data. The cross section window consists of the bottom, left and right axis lines, and grid lines. The cross section data consists of surface lines and surface features. The cross section data can also be updated with new surface data as it is obtained.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Create Cross Section



The Create Cross Section tool extracts elevation data from one or more surfaces and displays it along a linear path perpendicular to, or at a specified angle from, an alignment or other path.

The Create Cross Section tool has settings that define how the cross sections appear. However, when working in a production environment very few of these settings need to be altered. The Create Cross Section dialog box is organized with a tree and leaf interface. Below is a brief description of those settings that you may need to alter.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Create Cross Section > General Leaf

• Interval – specifies the spacing between consecutive cross sections.

• Left Offset – defines the left end of the range over which to extract cross sections. A negative value is to the left of the alignment. Left and right offsets are determined based on increasing stations.

• Right Offset – defines the right end of the range over which to extract cross sections. A positive value is to the right of the alignment, based on increasing stations.

• Vertical Exaggeration – specifies the vertical exaggeration for displaying cross sections. Values greater than 1.0 for this parameter increase the exaggeration.

• Surfaces – allows you to select which surfaces to display in the cross section. All surfaces currently loaded in InRoads are listed. You can enable multiple surfaces to be displayed in the cross section if desired.

Create Cross Section > Source Leaf

• Alignment – specifies the name of the alignment the profile follows.

Cross Section Annotation, Update Cross Section and End Area Volumes are covered in another lesson.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Viewing Cross Sections



Cross Sections can be viewed using the Cross Section Viewer. To access the Cross Section Viewer, select Evaluation > Cross Section > Cross Section Viewer.

There are two ways to view cross sections:

Movie Mode

Movie mode automatically displays each cross section in the list one at a time. The speed and display of the cross sections are controlled by the Zoom Factor and the Time settings. Click the Run button to start the “Movie”.

Cross Sections List

To view a cross section at a specific station, select that station from the Cross Sections list. The cross section is fit to your CAD view based on the Zoom Factor. The Up and Down arrows on your keyboard can be used to view each cross section from the list in succession.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create Cross Sections


Create Cross Sections

1 Select Evaluation > Cross Section > Cross Sections.

2 Open the Create Cross Section folder in the Cross Sections dialog.

3 Select the General leaf.

4 If you are using the Metric dataset, click the Preferences button and load the preference named Default_Metric.

5 Make sure the left offset is set to ‐50 [‐40].

6 Make sure the right offset is set to 50 [40].

7 Click Apply and follow the prompts.

8 Identify a location in the CAD drawing for the lower‐left corner of the cross sections (make sure you allow enough room for the whole cross section set so it doesn’t overlap with other graphic elements). The cross sections display.

9 Click Close.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


View the Cross Sections

1 Select Evaluation > Cross Section > Cross Section Viewer.

2 Select a Cross Section from the list.

The cross section selected is immediately displayed on the screen.

3 Select the first cross section at the top of the station list. Press the up or down arrows on your keyboard to view other cross sections in the list.

4 In the Movie Mode section, set the Time to .3 and click Run.

The cross sections display one at a time in the view.

The ESC key can be used to exit out of movie‐mode.

5 Close the dialog.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Create profiles

• Create cross sections



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 True or False: A profile is a series of elevations extracted along a baseline.

• True

• False

2 True or False. The Create Profile command extracts elevation data from only one surface at a time and displays it along a linear path.

• True

• False

3 True or False. Cross sections must be extracted along an InRoads alignment.

• True

• False



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 True or False: A profile is a series of elevations extracted along a baseline.

True – InRoads calculates the elevation from a surface each time the baseline intersects a triangle edge. The baseline is commonly a horizontal alignment but profiles can also be created along graphical elements or dynamically selected points.

2 True or False: The Create Profile command extracts elevation data from only one surface at a time and displays it along a linear path.

False – InRoads profiles can be created from multiple surfaces at one time.

3 True or False: Cross sections must be extracted along an InRoads alignment.

False – Cross sections can be extracted along different types of baselines including alignments, graphics, and dynamically‐selected points.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

15 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Create an existing ground profile and cross sections along Meadow Park Drive alignment.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Profiles and Cross Sections\Task\Meadow Park Working.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Profiles and Cross Sections\Task\Task ‐ Profiles and Cross Sections.rwk.



GeometryProject: Meadow Park.alg




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Create an existing profile and existing cross sections.

• Create an existing ground profile along the entire length of the Meadow Park Drive alignment. Place the profile to the right of the existing basemap.

• Create a set of existing ground cross sections along the entire length of the Meadow Park Drive alignment.

• The cross sections should be created every 50 feet [10M]. Place the cross sections above the profile.

• BONUS ‐ Create a single cross section set that specifies cross sections that are 100 feet [30M] wide (50’ [15M] left and 50‘ [15M] right) between station 15+51.15 [1+551.15] and 26+00 [2+200] and 250 [40M] feet wide (100’ [20M] left and 150’ [20M] right) between station 26+00 [2+200] and the end of the alignment.

Questions

• How many feet [meters] of grid on the top and bottom is empty on the profile (this is called WIndow Clearance)?

• How many surfaces can be displayed on a single profile?

• How many feet [meters] of grid on the top and bottom is empty on the cross sections (this is called WIndow Clearance)?

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Creating Vertical Alignments Using PI’s

In this chapter, we will learn about how to create vertical alignments using precision input. We will then create, display and annotate a vertical alignment.

Creating a vertical alignment using the “PI” commands is one of a number of ways to create vertical alignments. If your normal working practice does not use this method, you should skip this chapter. However, once this training course is ended, you will have this document and the dataset so you will be able to work through the content of this chapter at a later date.

Dec‐2011 Creating Vertical Alignments Using PI’s


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn about vertical alignments.

• Create vertical alignments using precision input.

• Edit vertical points of intersection (PI’s) and define vertical curves.

• Annotate a vertical alignment.

Creating Vertical Alignments Using PI’s Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Creating VA Using PIs\Practice\.

2 Select the file Vertical PI’s.dgn, then click Open.





2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Creating VA Using PIs\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ VA PI.rwk, then click Open.








DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

What is a Vertical Alignment?

What is a Vertical Alignment?

Vertical Alignments

A vertical alignment is a series of linear, circular or parabolic geometry elements. Connected together, the elements form a vertical alignment. The vertical alignment follows the path defined by a horizontal alignment.

Because of its dependence on the horizontal alignment, a vertical alignment is a child of the horizontal alignment in the geometry project structure. Each horizontal alignment can have multiple vertical alignments. A horizontal alignment must exist before a vertical alignment can be defined.

All vertical alignments under the same horizontal alignment must have unique names. Two vertical alignments under different horizontal alignments can have the same name.

Vertical alignments are created with the File > New command. In the New dialog, click the Geometry tab. In the Type field, select Vertical Alignment. Make sure that you have the correct active horizontal alignment because the vertical alignment is created as a child of the active horizontal alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Vertical Alignment Creation

Vertical Alignment Creation

Vertical Alignments

Just like horizontal alignments, vertical alignments can be created from graphics or from Vertical Curve Set tools. A profile must be created to use the vertical curve set tools.

Precision Input Key‐Ins

Two additional precision key‐ins are useful for vertical alignments. Like the horizontal precision input key‐ins, there are no spaces allowed in the format.

• se=station,elevation

• dg=distance,grade

The format for the grade is a percentage. For example, the grade can be 4% or 0.04. A negative grade is downhill and a positive grade is uphill.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Adding Vertical PI’s


Vertical Curve Set Tools

The Vertical Curve Set tools are used to add and modify vertical alignment PI’s and curves. These tools work very similar to their horizontal alignment counterparts.

Add Vertical PI

The Add Vertical PI tool is used to add a new PI in an empty vertical alignment, or to the beginning or end of an existing vertical alignment.

This tool has four optional parameters which are set on the Geometry > Vertical Curve Set > Dynamic Settings dialog. These settings influence the dynamic position of the cursor while using this command. The vertical PI position is incremented or rounded by the values specified when they are enabled. If none of the options are enabled, no rounding or incrementing is done.

• Station – when enabled, the station is incremented. The data point value is rounded (up or down, to the nearest value) such that its station is evenly divisible by the specified value. For example, a raw station value of 16+17.82



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


rounds to 16+00 with a station interval of 50. If the check box is cleared or if the interval is zero, the station is not incremented. This option also works with station equations.

• Elevation – when enabled, the elevation is incremented. The data point value is rounded (up or down, to the nearest value) such that its elevation is evenly divisible by the specified value. For example, a raw elevation of 1078.278 rounds to 1080 with an elevation interval of 10. If the check box is cleared or if the interval is zero, the elevation is not incremented.

• Grade – when enabled, the grade is incremented. The data point value is rounded (up or down, to the nearest value) such that its grade is evenly divisible by the specified value. If the check box is cleared or if the interval is zero, the grade is not incremented.

• Distance – when enabled, the distance is incremented. The length of the vertical curve is rounded (up or down to the nearest value) such that the length is evenly divisible by the specified value.If the check box is cleared or if the interval is zero, the curve length is not incremented.

The constraint parameter defines how the curve length is calculated.

• Length of Curve ‐ rate of change (r‐(g2‐g1)/L)

• K value ‐ (K=l/(g2‐g1)).



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create a New Vertical Alignment


Now that we have created our profile, the next step would be to design the vertical alignment. Like a horizontal alignment, one way to create a vertical alignment is to create a vertical alignment from graphics.

Create a New Vertical Alignment


2 Select the Geometry tab.

3 Set the Type to Vertical Alignment.

4 In the Name field, type Hemfield Vertical.

5 In the Description field, type Practice Vertical Alignment.

6 For the Style, select P_Cogo_PropVertical.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Add Vertical PI’s

1 Make sure you have a profile and that it is visible. If not, create one and zoom in to the left half (or third) of the profile.

2 Select Geometry > Vertical Curve Set > Add PI.

InRoads prompts you to identify the first point. This first point will be entered with a station elevation key‐in to accurately locate the point.

3 In the CAD Key‐in field, type se=2345.78,208.0[63.40].

The first PI is placed at station 23+45.78 [2+345.78] and elevation 208.0 [63.40].

4 Press Enter.

InRoads prompts you to identify the next point or reject the previous point. The next point will be entered with a distance grade key‐in.

5 Enter dg=600.0[182.92],‐0.03.

Distance of 600[182.92M] ft and downhill grade of 3%.

6 Press Enter.

7 If necessary, zoom out to see the graphics.

For the remaining PVI’s, we will graphically pick them.

8 Click near the top of the profile around Station 46+50 [3+050].

It doesn’t have to be exact, but follow the existing ground.

You can use CAD View tools in the middle of InRoads command. When you are done with the view manipulation, right‐click and InRoads will bring you back to the last step prior to your view command.

9 Place another data point at the end of our profile near the existing ground around Station 70+68 [3+770].

10 Place another data point just to the right of the last point but still inside the profile window.

11 Right‐click twice to reset out of the command.

12 Close the Add Vertical PI dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Editing the Vertical Alignment


Insert PI

The Insert PI tool places a vertical point of intersection between two existing vertical PI’s on the active vertical alignment.

Select the existing vertical alignment at the point where you want the inserted PI to be located. You are then prompted to accept or reject this element. Accept the element, and the alignment is dynamically attached to the cursor. You can then define the location of the new PI, either graphically or by precision key‐in. After you define the location of the inserted PI, you must accept or reject the overall solution. Depending on the specifications, the warning message “Solution Overlap” may display.

Before you can use this command, you must have an active geometry project, active horizontal alignment, and active vertical alignment. You must first place a profile window in the CAD file.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Move PI

The Move PI tool repositions points of intersection on the active vertical alignment. Any curves at the moved vertical PI are recomputed and updated.

When you click Apply, you are prompted to identify an element of the active vertical alignment. Select the vertical PI on the vertical alignment you want to move. You are prompted to accept or reject this point. When you accept the point, it is dynamically attached to your cursor. Specify a location for the moved element either graphically or by precision key‐in. You are prompted to accept or reject the overall solution. Depending on the specifications, the warning message Solution Overlaps may be displayed.

Delete PI

The Delete PI tool removes points of intersection and the associated vertical curves from the active vertical alignment.

When you click Apply, you are prompted to identify an element of the active vertical alignment. Select the vertical PI on the vertical alignment you want to delete. The selected vertical PI and any elements affected by the deletion will update to temporarily reflect the proposed solution. You are then prompted to accept or reject the overall solution. When you accept the solution, the vertical PI is deleted from the active vertical alignment. Any tangents or curves connected to the vertical PI are also deleted. If the deleted vertical PI had two tangents connected to it, then the vertical PIs on the opposite ends of those tangents are connected with a new tangent. If curves exist at the neighboring vertical PIs, they are recomputed using the point of intersection and the constraints you selected on the dialog box.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Edit the Vertical Alignment


Insert Vertical PI

Insert a PI around Station 63+00 [3+545].

1 Select Geometry > Vertical Curve Set > Insert PI.

2 Graphically select the alignment near Station 63+00 [3+545].

3 Graphically locate the new PI around Station 63+00 [3+545] and near the existing ground.

4 Click to accept the overall solution.

Insert another PVI at Station 50+00[3+200].

5 Graphically select the alignment at around Station 50+00 [3+200].

6 Graphically locate the new PI around Station 50+00[3+200] and near the existing ground.


8 Right‐click to terminate the command.

Move Vertical PI

Move the last PVI inserted.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


1 Select Geometry > Vertical Curve Set > Move PI.

2 Identify the PI that you just inserted at Station 50+00[3+200].

3 Graphically locate the PI around Station 52+00[3+215] and near the existing ground.



Delete Vertical PI

Delete the last PVI of the alignment (around Station 71+00 [3+790]).

1 Pan to the end of the profile.

2 Select Geometry > Vertical Curve Set > Delete PI.

3 Graphically select the last PI of the alignment (around Station 71+00 [3+780]).



You just edited your vertical alignment by using the Insert Vertical PI, Move Vertical PI and Delete Vertical PI tools. It is a good practice to save the geometry project after you make any changes.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Define Vertical Curve Set



The Define Vertical Curve Set tool defines new curve sets and modifies existing curve sets in the active vertical alignment. The accepted solution is displayed in the CAD file. By default, the first time you invoke this tool, the curve information shown is that of the first curve of the alignment.

Before you use this command, you must have an active geometry project, active horizontal alignment, and active vertical alignment. You must also have a profile window displayed in the CAD file.

Curves can be defined by several methods, but the two most common are Length of Curve and Pass‐through.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Define Vertical Curves


Now that we have created our PVI’s, the next step is to define vertical curves.

Define Vertical Curve

1 Select Geometry > Vertical Curve Set > Define Curve.

2 Enter 200 [100] for Length of Curve.

3 Click Apply.

Did you see the curve in the profile?

4 Click Next.


6 Click Apply.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Adjusting Vertical Curve

What if you meant to enter 400 [65] instead of 800 [60] ? And what if the vertical PI is supposed to be at Station 46+00 [3+060]?

1 Enter 46+00[3+060] for Station.


3 Click Apply.

You just moved the PVI to Station 46+00 [3+060] (elevation unchanged) and placed a 400’ [65M] vertical curve at that location.

Continue Defining Vertical Curves

1 Click Next.


3 Click Apply.

If you were to enter a length of 1000 here, the curve would not change because the length would be too big. The prompt would say “Solution overlaps or contains discontinuities.”

4 Click Next.

The Next button is now grayed out. This is because there are no more curves to define.

If the Previous button is grayed out, it means you are at the first curve of the alignment.

Define a Vertical Curve Passing Through a Point

1 Select Pass‐through for the Calculated By option.

2 Enter 63+25 [3+595.28] for the Station.

3 Enter 175.62 [52.73] for the Elevation.

4 Click Apply.

A curve was just created that has a point on curve at Station 63+25[3+595.28] and Elevation 175.62’[52.73].

The readout of the Pass‐through Station and Elevation fields is converted to the low point of a sag curve or the high point of a crest curve after Apply is clicked.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Edit the location of a Vertical Curve

1 Navigate back to the curve at around Station 52+00 [3+215] using the Previous button.

2 Select Length of Curve for the Calculated By option.

3 If the station is not at a full station, change it to 52+00 [3+215]. If it is, change it to 52+05 [3+215.10].

4 Click Apply and then Close.

You just edited the curve. You could go back and edit the curve at any time using this tool.

5 Fit the profile window you are working on in the view window to visually review your vertical alignment.

You have just finished defining your vertical alignment.

You will now save, review, display and annotate the alignment.

6 Select File > Save > Geometry Project or right‐click on the Hemfield Geometry Project in the InRoads Explorer Window and select Save.

Review Vertical Alignment

1 Right‐click on the vertical alignment (in the InRoads Explorer Window) and select Review or select Geometry > Review Vertical.

Like reviewing the horizontal alignment, you can either review the vertical alignment in its entirety or review the alignment one element at a time.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Vertical Annotation

Vertical Annotation

View Vertical Alignment

A vertical alignment can easily be viewed by right‐clicking on the vertical alignment in the InRoads Explorer Window and selecting View, or by selecting Geometry > View Geometry > Active Vertical command.

Annotate Vertical Alignment

The Annotate Vertical Alignment command displays and annotates vertical point and alignment information, such as tangent grades and vertical curve information.

In the Main tab, identify the vertical alignment you want to annotate (remember that the vertical alignment is a child of the horizontal alignment) and select the profile set you want to annotate.

If you have more than one profile set displayed, make sure you have the correct profile set selected; otherwise, you will not see the vertical annotation where you



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Vertical Annotation

expect it. If you know the name of the profile set, you can select it from the pull‐down list; otherwise, you could use the graphic locate button. Click on the graphic select button and identify the profile set you want to annotate.

The Points tab defines how the points on the vertical alignment are annotated.

The Curves tab controls the vertical annotation of the curves.

The Tangents tab controls the vertical annotation of the tangents.

The Affixes tab is used to define prefixes and suffixes for the different types of annotation.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Annotate the Vertical Alignment

Exercise ‐ Annotate the Vertical Alignment

View the Vertical Alignment

1 Right‐click on Hemfield Vertical in the InRoads Explorer.

2 Select View.

View the Vertical Annotation

1 Select Geometry > View Geometry > Vertical Annotation.

2 Click Apply.

The vertical alignment is now annotated.

3 Close the dialog box.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Understand vertical alignments.

• Create vertical alignments using precision input

• Edit vertical points of intersection (PI’s) and define vertical curves

• Annotate a vertical alignment



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 True or False: A horizontal alignment must exist before a vertical alignment can be defined.

• True

• False

2 List two precision key‐ins for vertical alignments.

1 – __________

2 – __________

3 Which of the following is not a valid method for defining a vertical curve?

A – Length of Curve

B – Pass Through Point

C – Unsymmetrical Length

D – Circular Curve

E – K = L/(g2 ‐ g1)

4 Which of the following commands would be the best choice to annotate curve and tangent information on an entire vertical alignment in one operation?

A – Geometry > View Geometry > Active Vertical

B – Geometry > View Geometry > Vertical Annotation

C – Evaluation > Profile > Annotate Profile

D – Evaluation > Profile > Annotate Feature in Profile

E – Drafting > Place Profile Note



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 True or False: A horizontal alignment must exist before a vertical alignment can be defined.

True – InRoads vertical alignments are children of a horizontal alignment and thus cannot be created until the horizontal alignment is defined.

2 List two precision key‐ins for vertical alignments.

1 – se=station,elevation

2 – dg=distance,grade

3 Which of the following is not a valid method for defining a vertical curve?

D – Circular Curve

There are several methods of defining vertical curves in InRoads, but circular curve is not one of them. Circular curves are defined for horizontal curves only.

4 Which of the following commands would be the best choice to annotate curve and tangent information on an entire vertical alignment in one operation?

B – Geometry > View Geometry > Vertical Annotation

The Vertical Annotation command would be the most appropriate choice for bulk annotation. This command annotates the points, tangents, and curves in a single operation. There are other commands that also provided annotation capabilities that can be useful in some situations but the Vertical Annotation command is typically the best choice for general annotation.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

30 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Create a new vertical alignment for Meadow Park Drive.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Creating VA Using PIs\Task\Meadow Park Working.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Creating VA Using PIs\Task\Task ‐ VA PI.rwk.







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Create a new vertical alignment for Meadow Park Drive.

Hint – Requirements are not necessarily in a step‐by‐step order, so read them carefully before you begin.

• Define a vertical alignment with 6 vertical PI’s and 4 parabolic curves.

• The beginning of the vertical alignment will be at station 15+51.15 [1+551.15] and elevation 201.072 [61.29].

• The maximum grade should not exceed 3%.

• The first vertical curve’s PI is at Station 26+00 [1+870.84] and elevation 204.00 [62.18].

• The next vertical curve’s PI is 500’ [152M] and ‐1.8% from the first vertical curve’s.

• The third vertical curve’s PI is at Station 37+00 [2+206.13] and elevation 181.00 [55.17].

• The vertical alignment has to pass through Sta. 25+25[1+850] and elevation 203.00[61.86].

• One of the vertical curves’ PI is at Sta. 40+00 [2+297.56] and Elevation 178.00[54.25].

• The vertical alignment has to have a 4’ [1.2M] clearance over a 24” [600mm] drainage pipe that has an invert elevation of 172.70 [53.28] at Sta. 40+50 [2+315] (ignore thickness of pipe).

• The minimum length of vertical curve is 200’ [60M].

• Design the alignment as close to the existing ground as possible.

• The end of the vertical alignment will be at station 41+65.75 [2+348.08] and elevation 179.71 [54.78].

• The proposed alignment should be displayed and annotated in the CAD file.

• Be sure to save the Geometry Project with the new vertical alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Questions

• What is the grade of the first tangent in the vertical alignment?

• What is the flattest grade of your alignment?

• What is the station and elevation of the lowest point of the alignment?

• What is the station and elevation of the highest point of the alignment?

• What is the length of the longest vertical curve?

• What is the length of the last curve?

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Creating Vertical Alignments Using Elements

During this lesson you will learn to create a Vertical Alignment using Elements.

The Elements capability is one of a number of ways to create vertical alignments. If your normal working practice does not use this method, you should skip this chapter. However, once this training course is ended, you will have this document and the dataset and will be able to work through the content of the chapter at a later date.

Dec‐2011 Creating Vertical Alignments Using Elements


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Create vertical elements.

• Edit vertical elements.

• Check alignment integrity.

Creating Vertical Alignments Using Elements Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Create VA Using Elements\Practice\.

2 Select the file VA Elements.dgn, then click Open.

3 Open the CAD fie key‐in window (Utilities > Key‐in).




2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Create VA Using Elements\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ VA Elements.rwk, then click Open.








DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Vertical Alignments

Vertical Alignments

Vertical Alignments

A vertical alignment is a series of linear, circular or parabolic geometry elements. Connected together, the elements form a vertical alignment. The vertical alignment follows the path defined by a horizontal alignment.

Because of its dependence on the horizontal alignment, a vertical alignment is a child of the horizontal alignment in the geometry project structure. Each horizontal alignment can have multiple vertical alignments. A horizontal alignment must exist before a vertical alignment can be defined.

All vertical alignments under the same horizontal alignment must have unique names. Two vertical alignments under different horizontal alignments can have the same name.

Vertical alignments are created with the File > New command. In the New dialog box, click on the Geometry tab. In Type, select Vertical Alignment. Make sure that you have the correct active horizontal alignment because the vertical alignment is created as a child of the active horizontal alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Vertical Elements

Vertical Elements

What Are Vertical Elements?

Geometry elements are defined using Fixed, Float and Free parameters. They are more flexible than the PI method, as they allow for parts of the alignment to contain discontinuities and gaps. They also enable the user to design parts of the alignment with constraints while still having free elements where needed. Because there can be gaps in an alignment defined with elements, you can define the alignment for the project by first establishing the straights and curves in the most constrained areas, and then complete the rest of the alignment later by filling in the gaps.

Vertical alignments defined using Elements are generally best suited to:

• Final design or reconstruction

• Brown field design

• Design in a restricted corridor



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Vertical Elements

Vertical Element Tools

The vertical element tools are found on the Geometry > Vertical Element menu.

The horizontal element tools can be activated and deactivated using Application Add‐Ins. If the Horizontal Element tools are not on your Geometry menu, select Tools > Application Add‐Ins. From the list of available add‐ins, select the Horizontal and Vertical Element Add‐in check box and click OK.

These commands are used to modify vertical alignments by adding, copying, editing, and deleting individual elements.

• Add Fixed/Floating/Free Vertical Line – places a linear vertical element.

• Add Fixed/Floating/Free Vertical Curve – places a vertical curve element.

• Connect Elements – moves one element and connects it to a second element.

• Cut Element – cuts an existing horizontal element into two pieces.

• Join Elements – joins two coincident, colinear elements to form a single new element.

• Move Elements – moves an existing horizontal element to a specified location.

• Copy Elements – copies a part of an existing alignment into the active alignment.

• Add Fixed Element – places a fixed element based on two parameters. The parameters include beginning station/elevation, ending station elevation, and delta angle.

• Edit Element – edits an existing horizontal element.

• Delete Element – deletes a selected vertical element from the active horizontal alignment.

• Check Integrity – identifies geometric integrity, reorders elements, fixes transpositions and deletes extraneous elements.

Simplified Vertical Element Tools

Simplified Vertical Elements are tools that are used to create geometry elements with predefined settings in the active vertical alignment. No dialog boxes appear when using the simplified vertical elements because the settings used are already specified. They can be changed by selecting Geometry > Simplified Vertical Element > Settings.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Fixed Vertical Elements


Add Fixed Line

Creates a fully constrained linear element in the active alignment.

There are two modes for this command:

• You can place a linear vertical element between two points. The points can be data points or can be specified as Station and Elevation pairs in the dialog box.

• You can place a linear vertical element by Point, Grade, and Distance.

Add Fixed Curve

Creates a fully constrained curve element in the active alignment.

There are two modes for this command:

• You can define a vertical curve by two points and either an R or K value. The points can be data points or can be specified as Station and Elevation pairs in the dialog box.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


• You can place a vertical curve by 3 Points.

When the Select Insertion Element check box is selected, the new element is added before or after an existing element in the active alignment. The reference element is selected during element placement. When the check box is cleared, the new element is placed at the end of the alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



Change Position Tools

Move Element – changes the position of an existing element.

Connect Elements – changes the position of an existing element but does so by connecting the beginning of one element to the end of a second element. This tool ensures that the two elements share a common end point.

Copy Element – copies one or more elements. You must identify the alignment the element is coming from, the first element in the alignment to be copied, and the last element to be copied. All elements between the first and last element are copied. If the same element is identified as the first and last element, that single element is copied.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Modify Element Tools

Cut Elements – divides the selected element into two elements.

Join Elements – joins two elements into a single element. The two elements must be the same type (linear or curve), be connected, and be tangent to be joined.

Edit Element – is used to edit existing vertical linear elements and curves. The element that will be edited is highlighted in the CAD file. Use the Select, First, Previous, Next, and Last buttons to navigate to the element you want to edit. The start, stop, or both ends of the elements can be adjusted. Two important options for this tool control how connecting elements are or are not modified along with the modified element.

Maintain Connected and Colinear Element – other elements are moved to maintain connectivity and remain colinear.

No Option Selected – only the edited element is adjusted. A discontinuity will exist between the edited element and the next element in the alignment.

Delete Element – is used to delete existing elements.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create a New Alignment

Exercise ‐ Create a New Alignment

Create a New Vertical Alignment


The New dialog opens.

2 Change the Type to Vertical Alignment.

3 Type Hemfield Vertical for the Alignment Name.

4 Set the Style to P_COGO_PropVertical.

5 Click Apply.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Floating Vertical Elements


Add Floating Line

Attaches a vertical linear element onto an existing vertical curve.

There are two modes for this command. You can place a linear vertical element by placing a Point at a station and elevation. Or you can place a linear vertical element by grade.

You can place a floating line by placing a point on the selected vertical curve. If you select the element near its start, the new line attaches to the start of the element. If you select the element on its end, the new line attaches to the end of the element. Or you can place a floating line by grade. Then, the system displays the element at the grade specified in the grade field of the dialog box.

Floating a line on the end of a curve will recompute the end of the curve and use the data point as the end of the line.

Floating a line on the start of a curve will recompute the start of the curve and use the data point as the start of the line.

After placement, the element to which you are attaching the line adjusts to maintain tangency and coincidence between the two elements.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Add Floating Curve

Places a curved vertical element that is defined by an existing vertical element. You can define a curve using the existing vertical element, a point, and an r value, k value or length, or you can define it using the existing vertical element, a point, and grade.

There are two modes in this pull‐down menu. You can define a horizontal curve by Point and Grade or you can place a vertical curve by Point and Parameter. Then the system displays the element using the parameters specified in the field of the dialog box.

When you select this command, the system prompts you to select an element by placing a data point on the element. That point serves as the initial point for your curve. If your point is on the starting half of the existing element, the curve will be added to the starting side of the existing element. If you select the ending half of the existing element, the curve will be added to the ending side of the existing element.

Floating a curve on the end of a line or curve will recompute the end of the line or curve and use the data point as the end of the curve.

Floating a curve on the start of a line or curve will recompute the start of the line or curve and use the data point as the start of the curve.

After placement, the element to which you are attaching the curve adjusts to maintain tangency and coincidence between the two elements.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Free Vertical Elements

Free Vertical Elements

Add Free Line

Attaches a linear vertical element between two existing vertical curves.

After placement, the elements to which you are attaching the line adjust to maintain tangency and coincidence between the elements.

Add Free Curve

Defines a curve between two existing vertical elements. The command prompts you to select the two elements by identifying each of them in graphics.

When you place the transitional element, the two elements connected by the transition are adjusted to maintain tangency and coincidence between the elements.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create Vertical Elements


Add Fixed Line

1 Select Geometry > Vertical Element > Add Fixed Line.

2 In the Add Fixed Line dialog, change the Mode to By Two Points.

3 Select the first Station/Elevation check box.

4 Set the station and elevation to the following:

• Station 23+45.78 [2+345.78]

• Elevation 208.00 [63.40]

5 Select the second Station/Elevation check box.


• Station 26+07.00 [2+425.43]

• Elevation 202.00 [61.57]

7 Click Apply.

8 Click to Accept, then close the dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Add Floating Curve

1 Select Geometry > Vertical Element > Add Floating Curve.

2 In the Add Floating Vertical Curve dialog, change the Mode to By Point and Parameter.

3 Select the Point check box.


• Station 26+66.02 [2+438.37]

• Elevation 199.36 [60.98]

5 Set the Parameter to Length and a value of 165.12 [50.33].

6 Click Apply.

7 When prompted to Identify Element, select the linear element that was just placed.

8 Click to Accept.

9 Right‐click to exit the command.

Add Floating Line

1 Select Geometry > Vertical Element > Add Floating Line.

2 Set the Mode to By Point.

3 Select the Station/Elevation check box and set it to the following:

• Station 27+93.21 [2+480.61]

• Elevation 194.46 [59.37]

4 Click Apply.

5 When prompted to Identify Element, select the last vertical curve in the alignment that was just created.

6 Click to Accept.


Add Floating Curve

1 In the Add Floating Vertical Curve dialog set the Station and Elevation to the following:

• Station 32+31.53 [2+601.71]

• Elevation 193.82 [58.69]

If the dialog is not open, select Geometry > Vertical Element > Add Floating Curve.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


2 Set the Length to 440.82 [134.36].

3 Click Apply.

4 When prompted to Identify Element, select the last linear element in the alignment that was just created.

5 Click to Accept.


Add Floating Line

1 In the Add Floating Vertical Line dialog set the Station and Elevation to the following:

• Station 45+85.23 [3+026.38]

• Elevation 214.38 [65.42]

If the dialog is not open, select Geometry > Vertical Element > Add Floating Line.

2 Click Apply.


4 Click to Accept.


Add Floating Curve


• Station 50+14.00 [3+171.19]

• Elevation 210.38 [63.85]

If the dialog is not open, select Geometry > Vertical Element > Add Floating Curve.

2 Set the Length to 431.00 [150].

3 Click Apply.


5 Click to Accept.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Add Floating Line


• Station 60+54.43 [3+473]

• Elevation 174.80 [53.29]

2 Click Apply.


4 Click to Accept.


Add Floating Curve


• Station 63+68.18 [3+561.67]

• Elevation 170.69 [52]

2 Set the Length to 312.00 [80].

3 Click Apply.


5 Click to Accept.


7 Close the Add Floating Vertical Curve dialog.

Add Floating Line


• Station 70+57.54 [3+781.93]

• Elevation 174.00 [53.04]

2 Click Apply.


4 Click to Accept.


6 Close the Add Floating Vertical Line dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Edit Vertical Element

1 Select Geometry > Vertical Element > Edit Element.

2 On the bottom right side of the dialog, click Last.

3 Set the Define From to Stop.

4 Set the Station, Elevation and Grade to the following:

• Station: 70+30.47 [3+760.33]

• Elevation: 174.08 [53.12]

• Grade: .5%

5 Select the Maintain Connected and Colinear Element check box.

6 Click Apply.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Check Integrity

Check Integrity

The Check Integrity tool is used to verify tangency and connectivity between the elements that make up a vertical alignment. The Check Integrity tool can be used on any alignment no matter how it was created.

This command is designed to fix several types of issues that are inherent in the design/implementation of Horizontal and Vertical Element commands. These issues are results of allowing you the freedom to work on any part of the alignment. These freedoms can create discontinuities, non‐tangency, and transpositions.

To activate the tool, select Geometry > Vertical Element > Check Integrity.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



Check the Integrity of the Alignment

1 Select Geometry > Vertical Element > Check Integrity.

2 In the Check Integrity dialog, select the first element at the top of the list.

The first element in the alignment should highlight.

3 Right‐click, and review the settings in the pop‐up menu.

4 At the bottom of the dialog, click Next and review the rest of the elements in the alignment.

5 When finished, close the dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Vertical Annotation

Vertical Annotation

View Vertical Alignment

A vertical alignment can easily be viewed by right‐clicking on the vertical alignment in the InRoads Explorer Window and selecting View, or by selecting Geometry > View Geometry > Active Vertical command.

Annotate Vertical Alignment

The Annotate Vertical Alignment command displays and annotates vertical point and alignment information, such as tangent grades and vertical curves.

In the Main tab, identify the vertical alignment you want to annotate (remember that the vertical alignment is a child of the horizontal alignment) and select the profile set you want to annotate.

If you have more than one profile set displayed, make sure you have the correct profile set selected; otherwise, you will not see the vertical annotation where you expect it. If you know the name of the profile set, you could select it from the pull‐



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Vertical Annotation

down list; otherwise, you could use the graphic locate button. Click on the graphic select button and identify the profile set you want to annotate.

The Points tab defines how the points on the vertical alignment are annotated.

The Curves tab controls the vertical annotation of the curves.

The Tangents tab controls the vertical annotation of the tangents.

The Affixes tab is used to define prefixes and suffixes for the different types of annotation.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Vertical Annotation

Exercise ‐ Vertical Annotation

View the Vertical Annotation

1 Select Geometry > View Geometry > Vertical Annotation.

2 Click Apply.

The vertical alignment is now annotated.

3 Close the dialog box.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Create vertical elements

• Edit vertical elements

• Check alignment integrity



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 True or False: At least one element must exist in the active vertical alignment before you can add a Floating element

A – True

B – False

2 Which of the following command(s) can be used to create a single curve from the active vertical alignment?

A – Remove Free Curve

B – Remove Fixed Curve

C – Delete Element

D – Remove Floating Curve

3 How are the Simplified Vertical Element Commands different than the traditional vertical element commands?



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:


1 True or False: At least one element must exist in the active vertical alignment before you can add a Floating element

A – True

B – False

2 Which of the following command(s) can be used to create a single curve from the active vertical alignment?

A – Remove Free Curve

B – Remove Fixed Curve

C – Delete Element

D – Remove Floating Curve

3 How are the Simplified Vertical Element Commands different than the traditional vertical element commands?

Simplified Vertical Elements are tools that are used to create geometry elements with predefined settings in the active vertical alignment. No dialog boxes appear when using the simplified vertical elements because the settings used are already specified. They can be changed by selecting Geometry > Simplified Vertical Element > Settings.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

30 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Create a new vertical alignment for Meadow Park Drive.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Create VA Using Elements\Task\Meadow Park Working.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Create VA Using Elements\Task\Task ‐ VA Elements.rwk.







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Create a Vertical Alignment using elements.

• Create a new vertical alignment for the Meadow Park Drive alignment. Use P_COGO_PropVertical for the style.

• Define a vertical alignment with at least 4 parabolic curves.

• The beginning of the vertical alignment will be at station 15+51.15 [1+551.15] and elevation 201.072 [61.29].

• The maximum grade should not exceed 3%.

• The first vertical curve should pass through the following stations and elevations:

Station: 23+17.82 [1+782.85], Elevation: 203.21 [62.10]

Station: 26+00 [1+856.13], Elevation: 202.53 [62.01]

Station:28+82.18 [1+930.55] , Elevation: 198.92 [61.23]

• The second vertical curve should pass through the following stations and elevations:

Station: 30+00 [1+992.48] , Elevation: 196.80 [60.28]

Station: 31+00 [2+008.43] , Elevation: 194.87 [60]


• The third vertical curve should pass through the following stations and elevations:




• The fourth vertical curve should pass through the following stations and elevations:

Station: 38+85.60 [2+295.48] , Elevation: 179.14 [54.29]


Station: 41+14.40 [2+325.48], Elevation: 179.18 [54.42]

• Complete the alignment by connecting the curves listed above with linear elements.

• The end of the vertical alignment will be at station 41+65.75 [2+349.64] and elevation 179.71 [54.76].



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

• The proposed alignment should be displayed and annotated in the CAD file.

• Be sure to save the Geometry Project with the new vertical alignment.

• Use the Check Integrity command to make sure all the elements in the alignment are the same direction.

Questions

• What is the grade of the first tangent in the vertical alignment?

• What is the flattest grade of your alignment?

• What is the station and elevation of the lowest point of the alignment?

• What is the station and elevation of the highest point of the alignment?

• What is the length of the longest vertical curve?

• What is the length of the last curve?

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Roadway Designer Overview

This module provides an introduction to the Template definition and Roadway Designer process. Having a general understanding of how these tools function makes it easier to learn the details of the tools in the following training modules.

Dec‐2011 Roadway Designer Overview


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives

In this lesson we will…

• Learn about template concepts and how to apply templates using the Roadway Designer.

• Assemble a template from components using the drag and drop workflow.

• Create a model of the roadway using the Roadway Designer command.

Roadway Designer Overview Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Start MicroStation and InRoads or Power InRoads

1 Double‐click the InRoads/Power InRoads shortcut



Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Roadway Designer Overview\Practice\.

2 Select the file SR 2067 Bypass.dgn, then click Open.

Open Project File



2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Roadway Designer Overview\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ Roadway Designer Overview.rwk, then click Open.




Existing Surface:C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Common References\SR 2067 Bypass Existing Ground.dtm

Geometry Project: SR 2067 Bypass.alg

Template Library: Template Standards.itl

Roadway Design: SR 2067 Bypass.ird



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Templates

Templates

After the proposed alignments and existing ground surface have been created, a model of the proposed roadway design is generated by assembling project templates and applying them to the project using the Roadway Designer. Templates are cross section views of the typical sections used to create the proposed design.

Individual templates are created and stored in the Template Library File, which has the file extension .itl.

The template library can be shared by many people, but it must be accessed as read‐only when it is being shared. Usually a project‐specific template library is created for each project and the appropriate templates are copied to that library so they can be modified to meet the specific needs of the project.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Applying Templates

Applying Templates

Templates are used to create a proposed model of the roadway. This is accomplished using the Roadway Designer. In the Roadway Designer, templates are assigned to specific stations along the mainline alignment at specific intervals, which are called template drops.

The Roadway Designer connects the points of the template drops, forming a model of the roadway, which is made into a surface model. The connected template points form longitudinal breakline features in the surface model.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Templates ‐ Surface Models

Templates ‐ Surface Models

Only the top points in the surface model generated by the Roadway Designer are triangulated.

All subsurface points that are lower than the triangulated surface are “Exclude from Triangulation” points in the proposed surface. The subsurfaces will appear, if desired, in the proposed cross sections as “components.” Components are used for volume calculations.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Create Template Dialog

Create Template Dialog

To create or edit a template library, select Modeler > Create Template. This opens the Create Template dialog, which is the primary place where templates are created and edited. This is also where templates are copied from a standard template library to a project template library using Tools > Template Library Organizer.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Template Names

Template Names

On the left side of the dialog is the Template Library area, which contains a Windows‐like folder structure. The root folder is the name and location of the template library that is currently open. Only one template library may be open at a time.

To navigate the folder structure, double‐click the folders you want to open or close. Inside any folder you can create and organize your templates and sub‐folders. The organization of the folder structure is user‐definable. The folder structure also supports common Windows functions, such as drag and drop, cut and paste, etc.

Most commonly‐used commands can be accessed by right‐clicking on the folder and template names. If you double‐click a template name, it becomes the Current Template and is signified by a red box around the template icon. The Current Template is also identified in the Current Template area next to the Template Library area. A template must be the Current Template in order to be assembled or edited.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Current Template Window

Current Template Window

In the center of the Create Template dialog is the main graph for creating templates. The graph is called the Current Template window. The Current Template window uses its own graphics engine and is not a view from the CAD file. The scale of the graph is dynamic and changes as you zoom in and out.

The center point of the Current Template window is marked by the dynamic origin, which is a magenta‐colored box. The dynamic origin is a reference point and can be moved to any location in the graph.

At the bottom of the graph are numerous view commands which allow you to manipulate the view of the template. These operate similar to CAD file view commands. If your mouse has a scroll wheel, it can be used to pan and zoom. The two buttons with the left and right scroll icons are used to undo and redo template creation operations. CTRL‐Z will undo your last edit or creation.

In the graph area you can right‐click to access additional commands and you can double‐click elements in the graph for editing purposes.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Template Preview Window

Template Preview Window

When you highlight (click on) a template, the template is displayed in the Preview area, which is located under the Template Library area.

You can use the preview to assemble templates from their parts or components, using drag and drop.

The cyan‐colored box in the preview represents the insertion point for any drag and drop operation. You can change the insertion point location by clicking the desired insertion point on the preview.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Dynamic Settings

Dynamic Settings

The Dynamic Settings dialog is used for precision input of the template components and for assigning point names and styles when creating components. It also serves as a compass for the location of your cursor with respect to the dynamic origin. The dynamic origin can be moved using Set Dynamic Origin, located at the bottom of the Dynamic Settings dialog.

The Dynamic Settings dialog is accessed by selecting Tools > Dynamic Settings or using the view control icons located below the Current Template window.

The Key‐in pull‐down specifies the type of key‐in to be performed.

• XY = absolute coordinates

• DL = delta coordinates from last point placed (defaults to the dynamic origin if it is the first point of a component)

• HS = horizontal delta distance and slope from last point placed

• VS = vertical delta distance and slope from last point placed

• OL = delta coordinates from dynamic origin

• OS = horizontal delta distance and slope from dynamic origin



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Components

Components

Components are logical parts of a template. Portions of the template that are separated into components are normally based on tabulation considerations. Examples of components include curb and gutter, median barrier, pavement layers, cut and fill slopes, and ditches.

Components are normally kept in a separate folder in the template library. They are used to assemble complete templates, by dragging and dropping the components to the Current Template window. When connecting two components, the connecting point changes to a white plus sign prior to placing the component. This is the indication that the points coincide. When the components are connected together, using drag and drop from the template library folders, any coincident component points will use the point name of the previously placed component. Template point names can be edited any time during the creation process.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Components

Components are normally created with point names that are not specific to the left or right side of the roadway. When they are used to create completed templates, prefixes and suffixes to the template points can be automatically added during component placement. Prefixes and suffixes are controlled using Tools > Options in the Create Template dialog and can be set and cleared in the Dynamic Settings dialog during placement using the Apply Affixes check box.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Merging Components

Merging Components

When combining two components of a pavement section together, two separate components are produced with a vertical segment dividing them. To remove the vertical segment and merge the two components into one, position the cursor over the vertical segment and right‐click. Then select Merge Components.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Basic Template Creation Workflow

Basic Template Creation Workflow

• Open an existing template library by selecting File > Open.

• Select Modeler > Create Template. This brings up the Create Template dialog.

• Navigate to the appropriate folder in the template library folder structure and select File > New > Template.

• Name the new template.

• Navigate to where the components are stored in the template library folder structure, and drag and drop the components to the Current Template window.

• If necessary, merge components together by right‐clicking on the vertical segment between two components and selecting Merge Components.

• Select the Display Point Names radio button in the Display area of the Create Template dialog box.

• Review the point names and edit them, if needed, by double‐clicking on the points in the Current Template window.

• Select File > Save to save the template library.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Creating a Template from Components


Continuing with the files from the previous practice exercise.

Create a Template Name

1 Select Modeler > Create Template.

2 Double‐click the root folder.

3 Select the folder named Templates in the Create Templates dialog.

4 Right‐click the Templates folder, then select New > Template.

5 Rename the new template Two‐Lane.

6 Select Tools > Dynamic Settings from the Create Template dialog.

7 Type 0.1 in both X Step and Y Step fields.

8 Select Tools > Options.

9 Select the Apply Affixes check box.

10 Type the following in the Prefix fields:

Left Prefix: LT_

Right Prefix: RT_



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


11 Click OK.

The Apply Affixes is automatically selected on the Dynamic Settings dialog.

Define Right side of Template

1 Double‐click the Components folder.

2 Drag and drop the component named Two‐Lane w/shoulders from the Components folder to the origin of the Active Template window (marked by a magenta‐colored box).

HINT – Watch the coordinates in the upper left portion of the Dynamic Settings dialog and drop the Two‐Lane w/shoulders component at the coordinates 0,0.

Define Left side of Template

Next we will place the Two‐Lane w/shoulders template again but we need a reflection of the template.

1 As you drag the component named Two‐Lane w/shoulders into the template window, Right‐click (you are still holding down the left mouse button when you right‐click).

2 Release the left mouse button and select Reflect.

3 Move the template to the 0,0 coordinates.

Notice the existing connection turns white when you are in the correct location.

4 Click to place the template.

You should now have both sides of a two‐lane roadway created.

If you make a mistake, use CTRL‐Z to undo.

5 Select Fit.

Define Curb and Gutter

This time we want to place both the left and right curb at the same time using the mirror function.

1 As you drag the component named Concrete Curb & Gutter into the template window, Right‐click while (you are still holding down the left mouse button when you right‐click).

2 Release the left mouse button and select Mirror.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


3 Right‐click again and clear the Reflect check mark.

4 Place the component at the edge of the right shoulder point.

The curb and gutter section is placed on both the left and right sides of the template.

Define End Conditions

1 Double‐click the End Conditions folder.

2 Drag and drop the end condition component named Simple Cut and Fill.

3 Place the component at the back of curb point on the right side.

4 Select Fit.

Merge Components

1 Right‐click on the vertical segments between the pavements boxes (yellow) in the center, then select Merge Components.

2 Right‐click on the vertical segments between the base boxes (orange) in the center, then select Merge Components.

Your template should look like this:

Save the Template Library

1 Select File > Save from the Create Template dialog to save the template library.

2 Close the Create Template dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Roadway Designer

Roadway Designer

After the templates are created, they are applied using the Roadway Designer. The Roadway Designer combines alignments, surfaces, and templates to create a model of the proposed roadway. It is also where superelevation is created and applied to the design.

To create and edit Roadway Designs, select Modeler > Roadway Designer. This brings up the Roadway Designer dialog.

The data you input into Roadway Designer is saved in the Roadway Design file, which has the extension .ird (InRoads Roadway Design).



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Roadway Designer Dialog

Roadway Designer Dialog

The Roadway Designer dialog has three window viewing areas, representing the plan, profile, and cross section views of the design.

These views use their own graphics engine, like the Create Template dialog, and are not CAD file views. The views show only what is related to the design, not what is displayed in the CAD file. The content of each window is controlled by the active Corridor selection and Active Surface settings.

The Roadway Designer dialog is resizable. Each window in the Roadway Designer can also be individually resized.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Roadway Designer ‐ Plan View Window

Roadway Designer ‐ Plan View Window

The Plan View window is located in the upper left corner of the Roadway Designer dialog. Although it looks like a standard view, the Plan View window does not display the graphics in the CAD file. Not having the CAD graphics displayed allows you to focus on the design data only.

Template drops are displayed as short brown lines. A template drop is the location where a new template begins. The Plan window is linked to the other windows in Roadway Designer via station positioning of the design. The station position is shown as the longer yellow line.

Other graphics in this window include the corridor centerline, original ground surface perimeter, and cut‐fill lines. As we increase the complexity of the design, other graphic indicators appear in the window. Mouse‐over tips are available and view controls are located on the bottom of all of the Roadway Designer’s view windows.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Roadway Designer ‐ Profile View Window

Roadway Designer ‐ Profile View Window

The Profile View window is located in the lower left corner of the Roadway Designer dialog.

It displays the Original ground surface line and the corridor’s vertical alignment. It is also linked to the station position of the design and that location is shown as a vertical yellow line. The scale of the Profile View window is dynamic based on the zoom controls.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Roadway Designer ‐ Cross Section View Window

Roadway Designer ‐ Cross Section View Window

The Cross Section View window is located on the right side of the Roadway Designer dialog.

It displays the Active surface line, (typically, existing ground) and the templates as they are applied to the design. This window will be a primary area for reviewing the design.

Additional display settings can be applied by right‐clicking on the window. The scale of the Cross Section View window is dynamic based on the zoom controls.

Located directly below the Cross Section View window is an area that displays the station currently displayed and several buttons that allow you to step through the design, based on stationing.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Roadway Designer Fundamentals


Corridor Management Command

A Corridor is a design section of roadway defined by the station limits of the mainline’s horizontal and vertical alignment. A corridor is created by using Corridor > Corridor Management.

To create a Corridor, name the Corridor, select a horizontal and vertical alignment, and optionally set the station limits of the project. A single roadway design file (.ird) can store multiple corridors for a project. The surface symbology is also specified when a corridor is created. The symbology is used to set the surface cross section and profile symbologies when an individual surface is created from the corridor.

The .ird file can only be opened by one user at a time.

The next step is to assign templates to the corridor, using the Corridor > Template Drops command.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Template Drops Command

Template Drops assign previously created templates to specific stations in the corridor. The XY = 0,0 point on the template tracks on the corridor’s horizontal and vertical alignment to form the proposed roadway.

To create template drops, select the appropriate template from the template library, the station where the template is applied, and the modeling interval. The final result is a station and template list.

Create Surface Command

Create Surface combines the corridor and template drops data to create a surface model of the proposed roadway design. This creates a surface consisting of the top surface of the roadway design and the subgrade components, which are Exclude from Triangulation points and children of the top surface. Components can be displayed in cross sections and used for volume calculations.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Basic Roadway Designer Workflow


• Open the geometry project, original ground surface (existing ground), and template library using File > Open.

• Select Modeler > Roadway Designer.

• Load the template library.

• Select File > New from the Roadway Designer dialog and enter the name of the new roadway design file (.ird). To use an existing roadway design file, select File > Open.

• Select Corridor > Corridor Management.

• Name the new corridor and select the appropriate horizontal and vertical alignments.

• Select Corridor > Template Drops.

• Select the appropriate template and associated station to apply that template. Repeat for template changes along the alignment.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


• Click Process All in the Roadway Designer dialog.

• Use the Roadway Designer’s view windows to review the design.

• Select Corridor > Create Surface and enter the name of the proposed surface.

• Select File > Save from the Roadway Designer dialog to save the roadway design file.

• Select File > Save > Surface to save the design surface.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create a Roadway Design


Continue using the files used in the previous practice activity.

Create a New Corridor

1 Select Modeler > Roadway Designer.

2 Select Corridor > Corridor Management.

3 Type SR 2067 Relocation in the Name field.

4 Click Add, then Close.

Create Template Drops

1 Select Corridor > Template Drops.

2 Double‐click the Root folder.

3 Double‐click the Templates folder.

4 Select the template named Two‐Lane.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Process All and Review

1 Click the Process All button located in the lower right corner of the Roadway Designer dialog.


3 Review the design in Roadway Designer.

Create Proposed Design Surface

1 Select Corridor > Create Surface.

2 In the Name field, type Finished.

3 Ensure that Empty Design Surface check box is selected.

4 Click Apply.


6 Close the Create Surface dialog.

Review the Design Surface Features

1 Select Surface > Feature > Feature Properties.

2 Select the Finished surface and review the list of features.

3 When finished, close the Feature Properties dialog.

Save the Roadway Design and Design Surface

1 Select File > Save to save the roadway design file.

2 Close the Roadway Designer dialog and review the plan features in the CAD drawing.

3 Save the surface Finished.dtm to the folder C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Roadway Designer Overview\Practice\.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Understand template concepts and how to apply templates using the Roadway Designer.

• Assemble a template from components using the drag and drop workflow.

• Create a model of the roadway using the Roadway Designer command.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 Are points in a template (top surface and sub surface) included in a single resulting design DTM?

• Yes

• No

2 Which method is used to set a template as active in the Create Template dialog? (Select all that apply).

A – Select the template name from the Template menu.

B – Double‐click on the template name in the Template Library list.

C – Right‐click on the template name in the Template Library list andselect Set Active.

3 True or False: The template preview window always shows the same template as the editing window.

• True

• False

4 True or False: The 0,0 position on the template will track on the corridor’s horizontal and vertical alignment to form the proposed corridor.

• True

• False

5 Can the results of the roadway model (pavement layers, side slopes, etc.) be reviewed without processing the entire project?

• Yes

• No



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 Are points in a template (top surface and sub surface) included in a single resulting design DTM?

Yes – All template points are included in the resulting design DTM. However, only the top points in the surface model generated by the Roadway Designer will be triangulated. All subsurface points that are lower than the triangulated surface will be “Exclude from Triangulation” points in the proposed DTM. The subsurfaces will appear, if desired, in the proposed cross sections as “components”.

2 Which method is used to set a template as active in the Create Template dialog? (Select all that apply)

B and C – To set the active template, either double‐click on the template name or right‐click on the template name and select Set Active from the menu. The active template is identified by a red box around the template icon.

3 True or False: The template preview window always shows the same template as the editing window.

False – Clicking on a template name results in that template/component displaying in the preview window. The previewed template/component can then be dragged onto the active template to create new components.

4 True or False: The 0,0 position on the template will track on the corridor’s horizontal and vertical alignment to form the proposed corridor.

True – The 0,0 position on the template defines where the template will connect to the corridor’s horizontal and vertical alignment.

5 Can the results of the roadway model (pavement layers, side slopes, etc.) be reviewed without processing the entire project?

Yes – You can review any station location along the project without processing the entire earthwork. The Roadway Designer processes the earthwork/cross section for the selected station location interactively as it is displayed. Any changes to the corridor settings will immediately be reflected in the displayed cross section.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Templates

This module is an introduction to the Create Template tool. You will learn the basics of creating and editing templates and the components and points that make up the templates.

Dec‐2011 Templates


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Where are we in the Big Picture?

Where are we in the Big Picture?


• Create the CAD file.

• Set project defaults.

• Analyzed the existing data.

• Created horizontal geometry.

• Created an existing ground profile.

• Created a proposed profile.

Now we are ready to design the roadway corridor which will involve the following tasks:

• Defining templates.

• Define and design corridors.

• Generate proposed surfaces.

Templates Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn about template point constraints and components.

• Create template components.

• Create a complete template from the components.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Templates\Practice\.


Open Project File



2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Templates\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ Templates.rwk, then click Open.







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Constraints on Template Points


Point constraints are used to manage the behavior of template points. They are used so that if a point is moved in a template, either by you editing the template or by the application of point controls during design processing, all the points related to the point being moved will behave in a predictable manner.

• A template point has a maximum of two constraints on it. A point with two constraints is considered “fully constrained.” A point that is fully constrained is represented by a red plus sign.

• A point that has only one constraint on it is considered “partially constrained” and is shown as a yellow plus sign.

• A point with no constraints (unconstrained) is shown as a green plus sign.

Constraints can also be labeled so that during the design process the value of labeled constraints may be changed. For example, the template may have a constraint label called Thickness that controls the thickness of the asphalt wearing surface. This thickness can be changed so that one template can be used for different asphalt depths, without having to edit the template.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Types of Constraints

The Roadway Designer provides a variety of constraint types for roadway template design, as described below. This course discusses the Horizontal, Vertical, and Slope constraints. Additional training on the more advanced constraint types is available in other Bentley Institute training modules.

Horizontal

The child point remains at the specified horizontal distance from the parent point.

Vertical

The child point remains at the specified vertical distance from the parent point.

Slope

The child point maintains the specified slope from the parent point. Additionally, slope constraints can have rollover values assigned to them. Rollover values are used to set the slope constraint based on a high side slope difference and a low side slope difference relative to a reference point which defines the controlling slope to the parent point. Slope constraints are absolute. Slopes going from lower left to upper right are positive regardless of whether the child point is to the left or right of the parent.

Horizontal Maximum

The child point has two parent points and remains at the specified horizontal distance from the parent point that is farthest to the right (has the maximum horizontal or X value).

Horizontal Minimum

The child point has two parent points and remains at the specified horizontal distance from the parent point that is farthest to the left (has the minimum horizontal or X value).

Vertical Maximum

The child point has two parent points and remains at the specified vertical distance from the parent point that is highest (has the maximum vertical or Y value).



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Vertical Minimum

The child point has two parent points and remains at the specified vertical distance from the parent point that is lowest (has the minimum vertical or Y value).

Vector Offset

The child point is projected onto the vector defined by two parent points. If the offset is zero, the child point is located on the parent vector. If the offset is not zero, then the child point will maintain a perpendicular offset from the parent vector at the specified offset value. Negative values indicate an offset to the left of the vector defined by the parent points. Positive values indicate an offset to the right.

Project to Surface

This constraint must be used in conjunction with one of the previously defined constraints. The other constraint defines the projection direction. The child point is projected to the surface with the specified name. If the surface does not exist, or no solution is found, the point remains where it is placed in the template.

Project to Design

This constraint is similar to Project to Surface, except that the point is projected to the design surface of the template. A projection value is given to indicate whether the projection will be to the left or to the right. The point must be constrained by one of the previous constraints, excluding the Project to Surface constraint, so that a direction for the projection may be determined. If no solution is found, then the point remains where it is placed in the template.

Angle Distance

Use this command to fully constrain a point in the template. This constraint requires two parent points, a distance, and an angle. The point is constrained to the location defined by the distance from the first parent, and the angle from the first parent relative to the vector defined by the two parent points. This constraint creates a rigid‐body rotation. When selected, no other constraint types are available.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Visual Indicators for Parent‐Child Relationship


Parent‐Child Point Relationship

When a point is constrained, it is constrained from either one or two other points. Points are constrained in a two‐dimensional (cross section) plane. Constraints can affect only the point’s offset and elevation, which are the X and Y coordinates in a cross section view. Point constraints are also directional. The direction forms a parent‐child relationship between points. If point B is constrained by point A, point A is said to be the parent of point B. When viewing the constraints, the parent point has a blue arrow pointing to the child point. To see the constraints in a template, select the Constraints radio button located in the Display portion of the Create Template dialog.

Horizontal Constraint

A horizontal constraint is when a child is horizontally constrained to the parent. When you move the parent point, the child point moves at a constant horizontal distance from that point, which is specified when the constraint is established. A



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


white horizontal line crossing over the blue arrow indicates a horizontal constraint.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Visual Indicators for Common Constraints


Vertical Constraint

A vertical constraint is when a child is vertically constrained to the parent. When you move the parent point, the child point moves at a constant vertical distance to that point, which is specified when the constraint is established. A white vertical line crossing over the blue arrow indicates a vertical constraint.

Horizontal and Vertical Constraint

A horizontal and vertical constraint is when a child is horizontally and vertically constrained to the parent. When you move the parent point, the child point moves at a constant horizontal and vertical distance to that point, which is specified when the constraint is established. A white horizontal and vertical line crossing over the blue arrow indicates a horizontal and vertical constraint. When a point has two constraints, such as horizontal and vertical constraints, that point is fully constrained and is shown in red.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Slope Constraint

A slope constraint is when a child is constrained to the parent by the slope between the two points. When you move the parent point, the child point moves at a constant slope with respect to the parent point, which is specified when the constraint is established. A white diagonal line crossing over the blue arrow indicates a slope constraint. When a point has only one constraint, such as a slope constraint, it is called a partially constrained point and is shown in yellow.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Observe Template Constraints Behavior


Select Template


2 Expand the root folder by double‐clicking the folder name.

3 Double‐click the Constraints folder, then double‐click the template named Constraints Behavior.

This makes Constraints Behavior the current template.

4 Select the Constraints and Display Point Names options in the Display portion of the Create Template dialog.

• Point 1 is the parent of Point 2.

• Point 2 is the child of Point 1.

• Point 2 is horizontally and vertically constrained to Point 1.

• Point 2 is the parent of Point 3.

• Point 3 is the child of Point 2.

• Point 3 is horizontally and vertically constrained to Point 2.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Move Template Points

1 Right‐click on Point 1 and select Move Point.

Observe how the Points 1, 2 and 3 move as a rigid body.

2 Right‐click to exit Move Point.

3 Right‐click on Point 2 and notice that Move Point is no longer available.

It is not possible to move a fully constrained point.

Let’s see what happens when we remove the vertical constraint from Point 2.

Change Point Constraints

1 Double‐click Point 2.

The Point Properties dialog opens.

2 Change Constraint 2 from Vertical to None.


Notice the color of the point turned from red to yellow.


1 Move Point 1.

Notice the horizontal distance between Points 1 and 2 remains constant but the slope is allowed to vary.


3 Move Point 2.

Notice the horizontal distance between Points 1 and 2 remain constant but again the slope is allowed to vary.

Also notice that the horizontal and vertical distance remains constant between Points 2 and 3.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



1 Double‐click Point 2 again.

2 Change Constraint 1 from Horizontal to Slope.



1 Move Points 1 and 2.

Notice the behavior is similar to before. However, Point 2 is now constrained at a constant slope from point 1 instead of at a constant horizontal distance.

Delete Component

1 Delete the component by right‐clicking with your cursor directly over the component and selecting Delete Component.

There is a different Delete Components command that is used to delete multiple components.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Adding and Deleting Constraints Graphically

Adding and Deleting Constraints Graphically

In addition to editing the template point constraints using the Point Properties dialog, you can right‐click on any point to access Add Constraint or Delete Constraint commands. This is very handy for making quick adjustments to the template constraints.

The Delete Constraints command removes all constraints from the point.

The Add Constraint command lets you pick the type of constraint you want to add to the point. The Full Constraint option adds both horizontal and vertical constraints to a point.

Right‐click on the child point you want to constrain, select Add Constraint, and select the point constraint you want to add. Then click the parent point and enter the offsets or slope values of the child point from the parent. Setting the appropriate constraints on points is important to achieve the desired results when pavement layers, superelevation, and transitioning are introduced to the design. The Point Properties dialog is helpful for adjusting point constraints after the initial point placement.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Adding and Deleting Constraints


Continue working on the template library used in the last exercise.

Delete Constraint

1 Select the Add and Delete Constraints template and make it the current template (double‐click on template name).

2 Select the Components and Display Point Names options in the Display area of the Create Template dialog, if they are not already set.

3 Right‐click on the CL_AGGR_B_BOT point and select Delete Both Constraints.

Notice the color of the point turns from red to green.

4 Delete the constraints on the EOP_AGGR_B_BOT and SHDR_AGGR_B_BOT points.

Add Constraints

1 Right‐click on the CL_AGGR_B_BOT point and select Add Constraint > Full Constraint.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


2 When prompted to select the parent point, click on the CL_AGGR_A_BOT point.

The Add Full Constraint dialog opens.

3 Type a Horizontal Offset of 0.0 and a Vertical Offset of ‐1.0’ [‐0.3 m], then click OK.

4 Right‐click on the EOP_AGGR_B_BOT point and select Add Constraint > Full Constraint.

5 For the parent point, click on the EOP_AGGR_A_BOT point.

The Add Full Constraint dialog opens.

6 Type a Horizontal Offset of 0.0 and a Vertical Offset of ‐1.0’ [‐0.3 m], then click OK.

7 Right‐click on the SHDR_AGGR_B_BOT point and select Add Constraint > Slope.

8 For the parent point, click on the EOP_AGGR_B_BOT point.

The Add Slope Constraint dialog opens.

9 Type a Slope of ‐6.0%, then click OK.

10 Right‐click on the SHDR_AGGR_B_BOT point again and select Add Constraint > Slope.

11 Click on the SHDR_AGGR_A_BOT point.

12 Type a Slope of ‐25.0%, then click OK.

Delete Components

1 Right‐click on the Current Template Window (but not over a graphic component element), then select Delete Components.

2 Hold down the left mouse button and draw a line across a few components, then release the left mouse button when done.

All of the components that the line crossed are deleted.

3 To undo the deletion, press CTRL+Z or select Edit > Undo.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

The Sign of the Distance and Slope

The Sign of the Distance and Slope

When defining components with precision input, the sign of the distance is dependent on the parent‐child relationship. The parent is always the first point placed when creating template components. The distance is positive if the parent has a lower X or Y value than the child. The distance is negative if the parent has a higher X or Y value than the child. The sign of the component slope is based on the mathematical slope.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Simple Component

Simple Component

A component is a set of points that define an open or closed shape. Each component, whether open or closed, can represent a different material or area of interest.

Components are saved in the template library and are normally stored in a separate folder in the Template Library folder structure.

To create a component, first select File > New Template and name the template component. Then, use Add > Simple or Add > Constrained to build the component. Each component has a name and an assigned feature style.

There are six types of components:

• Simple.

• Constrained.

• Unconstrained.

• Null Point.

• End Condition.

• Overlay/Stripping.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Simple Component

As you add template components, the area under the graph changes to represent the parameters for the component input type. This is called the Current Component area.

A simple component typically represents a section of pavement or sidewalk. It is a closed parallelogram that is defined by slope, thickness, and width. The top points are constrained by horizontal and slope constraints. The lower points are constrained to the points directly above them by horizontal and vertical constraints.

The Constrained, Unconstrained, and End Condition component types are discussed later in this chapter. Null Points and Overlay/Stripping components are more advanced than this course and are not discussed during this training.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Creating a Template of Simple Components




1 Select the folder named Components in the Create Templates dialog.

2 Right‐click the Components folder, then select New > Template.

3 Name the new template Concrete Pavement w/Shoulder.

Start Dynamic Settings

1 Select Tools > Dynamic Settings.

2 If selected, clear the Apply Affixes check box in the Dynamic Settings dialog box.

3 Set the Horizontal and Vertical Step to 0.1.

Add Simple Component

1 Right‐click on the Current Template window and select Add New Component > Simple.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


2 Set up the Current Component portion of the Create Template dialog as follows:

3 Place the component at the origin of the Current Template window.

4 Fit the display if necessary.

5 Right‐click on the Current Template window and select Add New Component > Simple.

6 Set up the Current Component portion of the Create Template dialog as follows:

Since this is the same name as the first component created, the name is automatically appended with a 1 resulting in CONCRETE1 as the component name.

7 Place the component at the right edge of pavement point of the Current Template window.

8 Fit the display if necessary.

Save Template Library

1 Select File > Save in the Create Template dialog to save the Template Library.

Component Name: CONCRETE

Style: P_ROAD_Concrete

Slope: ‐2.0%

Thickness: 1.000’ [0.300 m]

Width: 12.000’ [3.600 m]

Component Name: CONCRETE

Style: P_ROAD_Concrete

Slope: ‐6.0%

Thickness: 1.000’ [0.300 m]

Width: 8.000’ [2.400 m]



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Template Point Names


Templates are used by the Roadway Designer to create surfaces of the proposed roadway. Each template point is connected longitudinally to the next template drop, based on the interval, to form longitudinal breakline surface features. The names of those features are the names of the template points. Therefore, establishing a standard naming convention for template points is important to the quality of the proposed surface.

Likewise, individual component names also appear in the ensuing surfaces. These components are used for volume calculations, so standard naming conventions should be applied to ensure consistent results.

When transitioning between two templates (going from a two‐lane to a four‐lane roadway, for example), the Roadway Designer attempts to connect template points of the same name to model the transition. Template transitioning makes consistent template component and template point naming even more important.

Each template point name and component name must be unique within a template. For accurate volume calculations and surface creation (especially during template transition), different templates should use consistent component



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


and template point names. The Roadway Designer automatically appends the name with a unique number if the same name is chosen during template creation. Also, the Roadway Designer provides for automatic prefixes and suffixes (such as LT_ and RT_) when components are created or added to the left or right side of the origin point. Prefixes and suffixes for template point names are defined using Tools > Options in the Create Template dialog.

Edit template point names by right‐clicking on a template point and selecting Edit Point. Double‐clicking the point also invokes the Edit Point command. The Point Properties dialog is where the point name and surface feature style are changed. After you change the point name, click Apply to save the change. The Next > and < Previous buttons help to change multiple points by moving from point to point within the same template. Selecting the Display Points Names check box in the Display portion of the Create Template dialog allows you to visually verify the point names.

The Point Name List is a user‐defined list of standard point names that can be selected during component creation or editing to reduce time spent entering the names. To add names to the Point Name List, right‐click on Point Name List in the Template folders and select Edit, or double‐click on Point Name List.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Editing Template Point Names


Continue to work on the template named Concrete Pavement w/Shoulder.

The template components have been added, but the names should be changed to reflect a standard naming convention.

Create Point Names

1 Right‐click on the Point Names List, then select Edit.

The Point Name List dialog opens.

2 Type CL_CONC_BOT in the Name field.

3 Select P_COGO_MainCL from the Style list, then click Add.

4 Type EOP_CONC_BOT in the Name field.

5 Select P_ROAD_EdgeOfPavement from the Style list, then click Add.

6 Type SHDR_CONC_BOT in the Name field.

7 Select P_ROAD_Shoulder from the Style list, then click Add.

8 Close the Point Name List dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Edit Template Points

1 Double‐click the point located at the template origin.


2 Select CL from the Point Name list, then click Apply.

The point names available in the pick list are from the Point Name List.

3 Click Next>, which will move you down one point.

4 Change the Name as follows: Click Apply, then Next> and repeat.

5 Close the Point Properties dialog.

Merge Components

1 Right‐click on the vertical segment separating the road and shoulder, then select the Merge Components command.

The merged component is named CONCRETE.

2 Double‐click on the component to verify the name.


1 Select File > Save in the Create Template dialog to save the Template Library.

Name: CL_CONC_BOT

EOP

EOP_CONC_BOT

SHDR

SHDR_CONC_BOT



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Constrained and Unconstrained Components


The Add New Component > Constrained command is used to create open or closed shaped template components using precision input. You can access this command by right‐clicking on the Current Template window or selecting it from the pull‐down menu.

Examples of constrained components include median barriers, curb and gutter sections, retaining walls, and complex pavement sections.

Constrained components are created with horizontal and vertical constraints already applied to each point.

Both closed and open shaped components can be created. The option to make the component closed or open is selected by right‐clicking on the Current Template window during component creation.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


When creating template points, the Dynamic Settings dialog is used to define point names and styles. The Dynamic Settings dialog is also used to enter the precise location for the points.

The basic workflow for creating a constrained component is to:

• Select Add New Component > Constrained.

• Type in the Component Name and select the Style in the Current Component area.

• Type in the Point Name and select the Style in the Dynamics Settings dialog.

• Select the key‐in type (hs= for example) and type the precision value (12.0,2.0% for example) in the Dynamics Settings dialog.

• Press Enter or Tab to place the point.

• Repeat these steps until the last template point is placed.

• Right‐click on the Current Template window and select Finish.

The Add New Component > Unconstrained command is also used to create open and closed shape template components using precision input. You can access this command by right‐clicking on the Current Template window or selecting it from the pull‐down menu.

This command works the same as using Add New Component > Constrained except the components are created without any constraints on the points. The constraints are added manually using the Edit Point or Add Constraint command, accessed by right‐clicking on any template point



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Adding a Constrained Component

Exercise ‐ Adding a Constrained Component



1 Select the folder named Components in the Create Templates dialog.

2 Right‐click the Components folder, then select New > Template.

3 Rename the new template Curb.

Preparing the Settings Before Component Creation

1 If the Dynamic Settings dialog is not displayed, select Tools > Dynamic Settings.

2 If selected, clear the Display Point Names check box.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Adding a Constrained Component (Continued)


In this exercise you will create a Curb component.

Creating a Constrained Component

1 Right‐click on the Current Template window, then select Add New Component > Constrained.

2 Set the Current Component options as follows:

3 Set the Dynamic Settings dialog as follows:

4 Press Enter.

Component Name: CONCRETE CURB

Style: P_ROAD_ConcreteCurb

Point Name: SHDR (Select from the list)

Apply Affixes: Cleared

Precision Input: xy = 0,0



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Precision input values are entered in master units such as feet or meters. You can enter other units with the proper unit specification, such as 6” instead of 0.5.

Watch the prompts in the lower left corner of the Create Template dialog. When creating a component using precision key‐in, ESC allows you to go back.


6 Press Enter.


Notice that the software interpreted 5.5” as inches instead of feet saving you the need to do the math.

8 Press Enter.


10 Press Enter.


12 Press Enter.

13 Right‐click on the Current Template window and select Finish.

14 Select the Display Point Names option.

Point Name: TOC

Apply Affixes: Selected

Precision Input: xy = 0.07,0.5 [0.0225,0.150]

Point Name: BOC


Precision Input: hs = 5.5”,0.0 [0.140,0.0]

Point Name: BOC_BOT


Precision Input: dl = 0,‐16” [0,‐0.400]

Point Name: TOC_BOT


Precision Input: dl = ‐7.75”,0 [‐0.200,0]



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



1 Select File > Save in the Create Template dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Basic Component Creation Workflow




• Navigate to the template folder used for components.

• Select File > New > Template from the Create Template dialog. Name the new template, which is a component.

• Select Tools > Dynamic Settings if the Dynamic Settings dialog is not open.

• Select Add > Simple, Add > Constrained, or Add > Unconstrained from the Create Template dialog.

• Add template components by using the Dynamic Settings dialog to specify the Point Name and Style, and the point locations.

• Select File > Save from the Create Template dialog to save the template library.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Creating End Conditions


End conditions are template components which are used to model cut and fill treatments. They are added to the end of simple, constrained, and unconstrained components.

End conditions are created like other template components. End conditions consist of template points and individual components, and appear as line segments. They are different than simple and constrained components because they have the ability to target surfaces, elevations, alignments and surface features.

An example of this targeting is a design criteria which specifies a 4:1 fill slope if a fill height under 6 feet is encountered. The target type is the original ground surface.

To create an end condition, first select File > New Template and name the template. Then use Add New Component > End Condition to build the end conditions. End conditions are stored in the template library and normally are created in a separate folder in the template library.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Target Types

Target types are specified in the Current Component portion of the Create Template dialog, which opens below the Current Template window during end condition creation.

Target types are defined only for end condition components, and are a property of the component. To edit a target type, open the Component Properties dialog by double‐clicking on the component or by right‐clicking on the component and selecting Edit Component.

A solution can intercept multiple targets and target types. A ditch design, for example, may intercept an alignment that defines the location or profile of the ditch bottom and then intercept the original ground surface to form the backslope of the ditch.

Surface – targets the active surface or any specified surface. Using the active surface as the target helps when you are applying the end conditions to different projects. This is because the end condition will still work even though the target surface name may be different, so long as it is designated as the active surface.

Elevation – targets any specified elevation.

Feature XY – targets the horizontal offset of any specified surface feature.

Feature Elevation – targets the vertical elevation of any specified surface feature.

Feature XYZ – targets the horizontal offset and vertical elevation of any specified surface feature.

Alignment XY – targets the horizontal offset of any specified alignment.

Alignment Elevation – targets the vertical elevation of any specified alignment.

Alignment XYZ – targets the horizontal offset and vertical elevation of any specified alignment.

Style Elevation – targets the elevation of any specified style.

Style XY – targets the horizontal offset of any specified style.

Style XYZ – targets the horizontal offset and vertical elevation of any specified style.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

End Conditions Settings


End Condition Priority

Simple end conditions consist of cut and fill segments. When creating the roadway design, each condition is tested in a specific order, called the priority. The priority is numeric and is assigned during end condition creation, with the most desirable conditions assigned the lowest priority numbers. The first condition to be tested has a priority of 1. The next condition to be tested has a priority of 2, and so on.

For example, a design criteria calls for two fill conditions: 4:1 fill slope for an 8 foot [2.5 m] fill height and a 3:1 fill slope for a 10 foot [3.0 m] fill height. In this example, the target of each condition is the original ground surface. Each condition is tested starting with lowest priority number. The first condition to successfully intersect the target, which in this example is the original ground surface, is applied.

Priority is used when more than one end condition starts at the same point. In order for an end condition segment to be placed and used in the design, a segment or one of the segments connected to that segment must successfully



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


intercept its target. If a segment or its connected segments do not intercept their targets, that group of segments fails, and the group of segments with the next higher priority is tested. It is important that end conditions have at least one solution that will not fail to intercept their targets.

End Condition Settings

As you create the end conditions, there are several settings that must be considered to obtain the desired results. These settings are set using the Dynamic Settings dialog during end condition point creation. To edit end condition settings, open the Point Properties dialog by double‐clicking on the end condition point or by right‐clicking on the point and selecting Edit Point.

Check for Interception – When set, the line segment will search for the specified target. If not set, the line segment will be created at its full width regardless of whether it intersects the target, provided that one of the segments connected to this segment successfully intersects the target.

Place Point at Interception – When set, a point will be placed at the location of the interception. If not set, the line segment will be created at its full width, provided that one of the segments connected to this segment successfully intersects the target.

End Condition is Infinite – When set, the line segment will automatically be extended to intercept the target even when the width required is greater than the specified width for the line segment. If not set, the line segment will only extend to its maximum constraint to intersect the target. This applies only to the last line segment in an end condition.

Do Not Construct – If set, the end point of the line segment will be used as a reference point to find a subsequent point. The point will be solved like any other end condition point, but that point will be skipped when drawing the final component segments. This is used for more complex condition testing than is discussed in this training module.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Creating End Conditions


In this exercise you will create an End Condition component.

Create a New Template Name

1 Select the End Conditions folder in the Create Templates dialog.

2 Right‐click the End Conditions folder, then select New > Template.

3 Rename the new template Simple Cut and Fill.

Start the Dynamic Settings

1 Select Tools > Dynamic Settings, if not already displayed.

2 Select the Display Point Names check box, if not already selected.

Create End Condition Components

1 Right‐click on the Current Template Window and select Add New Component > End Condition.

The example design criteria calls for a 6:1 fill slope at fill heights between 0 to 5’ [0 to 1.5 m].



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


2 Set the Current Component portion of the Create Template dialog as follows:


4 With your cursor in the xy=0,0 field, press Enter.


6 With your cursor in the Precision Input field, press Enter.


The type of key‐in used affects the constraints that are created. For example, the vs= key‐in creates a slope and a vertical constraint. The hs= keyin creates a slope and a horizontal constraint.The xy= key‐in creates a horizontal and a vertical constraint.

Name: 6:1 FILL

Style: P_ROAD_FillLine

Target Type: Surface

Priority: 1

Surface <Active>

Point Name: BOC (select from list)


Precision Input: xy = 0,0

Check for Interception: Selected

Place Point at Interception: Selected

End Condition is Infinite: Cleared

Do Not Construct: Cleared

Point Name: 6:1 FILL (enter the name)

Point Style: P_ROAD_FillLine


Precision Input: vs = ‐5.0,‐1:6 [‐1.5,‐1:6]



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


8 Right‐click on the BOC point on the Current Template Window and select Add New Component > End Condition.

The example design criteria calls for a 3:1 fill slope for fill heights greater than 5’ [1.5 m].





Name: 3:1 FILL

Style: P_ROAD_FillLine


Priority: 1

Surface: <Active>



End Condition is Infinite: Selected


Point Name: 3:1 FILL

Point Style: P_ROAD_FillLine


Precision Input: vs = ‐5.0,‐1:3 [‐1.5,‐1:3]



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


13 Right‐click on the BOC point in the Current Template window and select Add New Component > End Condition.

The example design criteria calls for a 3:1 cut slope for all cut conditions.






1 Select File > Save in the Create Template dialog.

Name: 3:1 CUT

Style: P_ROAD_CutLine


Priority: 1

Surface: <Active>





Point Name: 3:1 CUT

Point Style: P_ROAD_CutLine


Precision Input: vs = 5.0,33.3% [1.5,33.3%]



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Adding a Ditch End Component


Continue to work on the end condition template named Simple Cut and Fill.

Create Ditch End Components

1 Right‐click on the 3:1 FILL point in the Current Template window and select Add New Component > End Condition.


Name: DITCH

Style: P_ROAD_Ditch


Priority: 1

Surface: <Active>



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


3 To place the second point, set the Dynamic Settings dialog as follows:







Point Name: DITCH BOTTOM (select from list)

Check for Interception:ClearedThis forces this line segment to be placed.




Precision Input: hs = 5,‐1:4 [1.5,‐1:4]

Point Name: DITCH BACKSLOPE (select from list)

Check for Interception:ClearedThis forces this line segment to be placed.




Precision Input: hs = 5,0 [1.5,0]

Point Name: DAYLIGHT (select from list)






Precision Input: hs = 2,25% [0.6,25%]



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



1 Select File > Save to save the template library.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Testing the End Conditions

Testing the End Conditions

Testing End Conditions

End Conditions can be tested prior to and during end condition creation. Testing simulates how the end conditions will behave during modeling, without using the Roadway Designer.

To test that the end conditions produce the desired results, select the Test button located under the Current Template window. This opens the Test End Conditions dialog. The window in the Test End Conditions dialog displays non‐end‐condition components as solid lines and end conditions as dotted lines. The scale of this window is dynamic and view controls are located at the bottom.

To test the end conditions, select one of the available targets and select the Draw button located on the right side of the dialog. Move your cursor over the testing window. The end conditions will change from a dotted line to a solid line, revealing the final solution for the proposed target intercept. If there are any priority conflicts, you will receive a warning message. Select the Check Priorities button to review and edit the priority of each end condition.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Testing the End Conditions


Continue to work on the end condition template named Simple Cut and Fill.

Test the End Conditions and Change the Priority

1 Select Test located below the Current Template window.

A warning will be given that the template has end condition priority conflicts.

2 Click OK on the warning dialog.

3 Select Check Priorities on the right side of the Test End Conditions dialog.

Notice that BOC point is a bold white color, which is an indicator of the point that has the priority conflicts.

4 Select Edit.

Notice that all the end conditions have the same priority number.

5 Put your cursor in each of the fields and notice the segments highlighting.

6 Assume that 6:1 fill is the most desirable condition and change the Priority of the 3:1 FILL to 2 and the Priority of the 3:1 CUT to 3.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


7 Click OK, then Close.

8 Click Draw on the right side of the Test End Conditions window.

9 Move your cursor over the end conditions.

10 Change the Use Surface Slope to 10.00% and click Draw again.

11 Move your cursor over the end conditions.

12 Close the Test End Conditions dialog.


1 Select File > Save to save the template library.





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Basic End Condition Component Creation Workflow




• Navigate to the template folder used for End Condition components.

• Select File > New > Template from the Create Template dialog. Name the new template, which is an end condition component.

• Select Tools > Dynamic Settings if the Dynamic Settings dialog is not open.

• Select Add > End Condition from the Create Template dialog.

• Add end condition components by using the Dynamic Settings dialog to specify the Point Name and Style, and the point locations.

• Select File > Save from the Create Template dialog to save the template library.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Understand template point constraints and components.

• Create template components.

• Create a complete template from the components.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 True or False: Point constraints are used to manage the behavior of template points.

• True

• False

2 A “Fully Constrained” point contains a maximum of how many constraints?

A – None

B – One

C – Two

D – Three

3 Name three types of Constraints.

A –

B –

C –

4 True or False: The top points of a simple component are constrained to points directly below them by horizontal and vertical constraints.

• True

• False

5 Which template component is used to model cut and fill treatments?

A – Constrained

B – Simple

C – End Condition

D – Unconstrained



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 True or False: Point constraints are used to manage the behavior of template points.

True – Point constraints are used to manage the behavior of template points. They are used so that if a point is moved in a template, either by the user editing the template or by the application of point controls during the design processing, all the points related to the point being moved will behave in a predictable manner.

2 A “Fully Constrained” point contains a maximum of how many constraints?

C – A point with two constraints is considered “fully constrained”.

3 Name three types of Constraints.

A – Horizontal Constraint

B – Vertical Constraint

C – Slope Constraint

4 True or False: The top points of a simple component are constrained to points directly below them by horizontal and vertical constraints.

False – The lower points are constrained to points directly above them by horizontal and vertical constraints.

5 Which template component is used to model cut and fill treatments?

C – End Conditions are template components which are used to model cut and fill treatments. They are added to the end of simple, constrained, and unconstrained components.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

1 Hour 40 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Create a roadway template from scratch and use that template to create a roadway design.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Templates\Task\Firethorne.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Templates\Task\Task ‐ Templates.rwk.



Geometry Project: Firethorne Road.alg

Existing Ground:C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\_Common References\Existing Ground Survey.dtm




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Create a roadway template from scratch and a roadway design.

• Use the horizontal alignment named Firethorne Road.

• Use the vertical alignment named Profile Grade.

• Create a complete template using the sketches provided on the following pages.

• Create components separately.

• Clear Apply Affixes when creating components.

• Use the style P_ROAD_Concrete for the Sidewalk component.

• Drag and drop completed components with Apply Affixes selected.

• Adjust template point locations or constraints using the Edit Point command if necessary.

• Test the end conditions prior to creating the surface model.

• Use the Point Names List to create any missing point names and associated styles (most point names have already been created).

• Create a roadway design and design surface.

• Create cross sections and review the design.

• Save all new or modified files.

For assistance with assembling a template from components, refer to the Roadway Designer Overview training module.

Tips

• Start the curb at the Shoulder point and work in a counter‐clockwise direction.

• If you have difficulty creating AGGREGATE TYPE B pavement layer, then create all other components first.

• The Cut & Fill Detail is not to scale, so be sure to use the values specified for the clearzones on each end condition.

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Roadway Detail

Roadway Detail



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Curb and Gutter Detail

Curb and Gutter Detail



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Cut and Fill Detail

Cut and Fill Detail



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Cut and Fill Detail



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Template Transitioning

This module teaches how to use multiple templates in a single design process. You will learn how to control the transition of points and components between the dissimilar templates.

Dec‐2011 Template Transitioning


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn about Transitioning Templates.

• Create Transitioning Templates.

• Create a design model of the transitioning roadway.

Template Transitioning Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Template Transitioning\Practice\.


Open Project File



2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Template Transitioning\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ Template Transitioning.rwk, then click Open.










DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



More complicated designs often call for multiple templates that vary throughout the corridor. Whenever two or more different templates are applied to a single corridor using the Roadway Designer, transitioning between the templates occurs. For example, a template transition occurs when the roadway design changes from a two‐lane to a four‐lane roadway.

Transitioning can be as simple as the width of the travel lane increasing. Regardless of the transition complexity, transitions must be identified and verified to obtain desirable results. How template points are connected between two consecutive templates greatly influences the design results.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Multiple Template Drops



Template transitions occur between templates that have different names in the Template Drops dialog. To hold a template cross section through a station range, assign the template at its starting station and assign the same template again at the station where it starts its transition.

In the example above, the template named Two‐Lane starts at Station 100+00 and is held until Station 120+00. Between Station 120+00 and 125+00 the Two‐Lane transitions to the Three‐Lane template. This is called the template transition area. If no other templates are applied down‐station of 125+00, the Three‐Lane template will continue to the end of the corridor.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Template Transition Areas



When adding more than one template using the Template Drops command, template transition areas are displayed in the Roadway Designer’s Plan View window. They are shown as colored rectangles between the template drops. Template drops are shown as transverse brown colored lines.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Transition Area Colors



The color of the transition areas indicates the condition of the transition with respect to how the points are connected. Template points of two different templates are connected automatically if they have the same point names. This is the most desirable condition. If the points names are different or the number of points between the two templates are not the same, then the point connection must be manually specified for each transition. Regardless of the condition, each transition area must be verified prior to processing. Template point constraints greatly affect the transitioning results.

• A red color transition means that none of the template points are connected because the point names between the two templates do not match.

• A yellow color transition means that some of the points are connected by similar names, but additional connections still need to be defined.

• A light blue color means that not all the points are connected, but the transition has been reviewed.

• A dark blue color means all the points are connected and the transition has been reviewed.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Transition from Two to Three Lanes


Continue working with the file SR 2067 Bypass.




3 In the Name field, type Template Transitioning.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3




2 In the Library Templates section, browse to the Templates folder, select the template named Two‐lane and type 150+00 [15+000] for the station and click Add.

3 Select the template named Two‐lane again and type 170+00 [15+600] for the Station and click Add.

4 Select the template named Three‐lane and type 180+00 [15+900] for the Station and click Add.

5 Close the Template Drops dialog.

6 Observe the yellow transition area in the Plan View window.

7 Review the template transitioning in the Cross Section View window.

Notice that no transitioning occurs between the two templates.

Save the Roadway Design

1 Select File > Save to save the roadway design.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Transition Verification



To review the transition areas, double‐click on the transition area in the Plan View window. This displays the Edit Transition dialog, which shows the point connections between the two templates.

Template points which have similar names are connected with line segments. Template points that are not connected, either because they don’t have similar names or the number of templates points differ, display as bold‐colored points. To connect an unconnected point, first click on any bold point and then click on the connection point. A line segment is drawn between the points. The feature style and name used for the line is determined by the first point selected when connecting points.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


A single point can have more than one connection. To remove a connection line, right‐click on the line and select Delete.

The 3‐D display can be manipulated using the view controls located at the bottom of the view. To move the template in the view, right‐click on any template point and select Move Template. Moving the templates makes it easier to connect more complicated templates. End condition components are not shown or edited during this process.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Edit Transition Connections

Exercise ‐ Edit Transition Connections

Continue working on the corridor named Template Transitioning.

Identify the Transition Area

1 Double‐click the yellow transition area on the Plan View window.

Connect the Free Points

1 Click the bold point, which is not connected (Three‐lane‐RT_Pass_Lane), and click the right edge of pavement point (Two‐lane‐RT_EOP).

This draws a connecting line between these points.

2 Right‐click on any point and select Move Template.

3 Move the template and click to end the move operation.

4 Right‐click to stop the dynamic move.

5 Click OK to accept the transition connections.

6 Click OK on the Reminder dialog that the constraints must be removed.

7 Leave the Edit Transition Midpoint dialog OPEN. It will be used in the next exercise.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



Transition Testing

After the points are connected using the Edit Transition dialog, the transitioning is reviewed and edited using the Edit Transition Midpoint dialog. This dialog displays a cross section view of the two templates as they transition. The dialog starts by displaying the midpoint between the two templates. Located on the bottom of the window is a slider bar which is used to view different locations on the transition.

If the template points are constrained in a manner that prohibits the template transition, they can be edited in this dialog. Just like in the Create Template dialog, right‐clicking on any point brings up the editing options. You can also double‐click on any point to bring up the Point Properties dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Transition Testing


Continue working on the corridor named Template Transitioning.

You should have the Edit Transition Midpoint dialog shown from the previous exercise.

Review the Transition

1 Select the Display Point Names check box at the bottom of the Edit Template Midpoint dialog.

2 Move the template slider bar.

Notice the template does not transition.


1 Right‐click on the point named RT_PASS_LANE and select Delete Both Constraints.

2 Right‐click on the point named RT_PASS_LANE again and select Add Constraint > Slope.

3 Click the RT_EOP point. (Note prompts on lower left of dialog).

4 Click OK on the Add Slope Constraint dialog (‐2.0% slope).



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


5 Move the template slider bar again.

The transition should be working now.

6 Click OK when done.

Notice that the color of the transition area in the Plan View window is now dark blue, indicating that all points are connected and the transition has been reviewed.


1 Select Process All and review the transitioning in the Cross Section View window.

2 Select Corridor > Create Surfaces.

3 Type Finished in the surface name field.

4 Select the Features check box in the Display in Plan View area.

5 Click Apply then Close.


7 Close the Roadway Designer dialog.

8 Review the plan view graphics of the transition area in the CAD file.

Save the Roadway Design

1 Save the surface Finished to the directory C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Template Transitioning\Practice\.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Template Transitioning Workflow

Template Transitioning Workflow

Basic Template Transitioning Workflow

• Select Template Drops and add more than one template drop.

• Identify the template transition areas on the Plan View window, which will be a solid colored rectangle located between the template drops.

• Verify the first template transition by double‐clicking the transition area in the Plan View area.

• Verify the point connections are correct in the Edit Transition dialog. Add or modify the point connections, if needed, by clicking on non‐connected points and connecting them to the appropriate points.

• Review the transitioning in the Edit Transition Midpoint dialog by using the transition slider bar. If point constraint edits are needed to resolve the transition, right‐click on any point and edit the constraints.

• Repeat this process for all transitions.

• Select Process All and review the results of the design.

• Select File > Save to save the roadway design.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Understand Transitioning Templates.

• Create Transitioning Templates.

• Create a design model of the transitioning roadway.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 True or False: Template transitions occur between templates that have different names in the Template Drops dialog.

• True

• False

2 Describe the different Transition Area colors, listed below:

Red –

Yellow –

Light blue –

Dark blue –

3 True or False: When verifying a template transition, a bold‐colored point indicates a good connection.

• True

• False



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 True or False: Template transitions occur between templates that have different names in the Template Drops dialog.

True – Template transitions occur between templates that have different names in the Template Drops dialog.

2 Describe the different Transition Area colors, listed below:

Red – No template points are connected because the point names are not similar.

Yellow – Some template points are connected by similar names.

Light blue – Not all points are connected, but the transition has been reviewed.

Dark blue – All points are connected and reviewed.

3 True or False: When verifying a template transition, a Bold‐colored point indicates a good connection.

False – Bold‐colored points indicate no connection.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

20 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Use the Roadway Designer to create a roadway that transitions from four lanes to two lanes.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Template Transitioning\Task\SR 1455.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Template Transitioning\Task\Task ‐ Template Transitioning.rwk.



Geometry Project: SR 1455.alg

Existing Ground: Existing Ground Survey.dtm




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Create a roadway that transitions from four lanes to two lanes.

• Create a design surface.



• Horizontal Alignment Name: SR 1455.

• Vertical Alignment Name: Profile Grade.

• Four‐lane starts at 122+46.41 [12+246.41].

• Transition starts at 130+50 [12+490].

• Four‐lane to two‐lane transition is 400 feet [120 m].

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Transition Detail

Transition Detail



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Transition Detail



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Template Point Controls

This module teaches how to use Template Point Controls to override the normal horizontal and vertical locations of template points during the modeling process.

Dec‐2011 Template Point Controls


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn about template point controls.

• Create horizontal and vertical controls.

• Create a design model of the roadway.

Template Point Controls Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Template Point Controls\Practice\.


Open Project File



2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Template Point Controls\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ Template Point Controls.rwk, then click Open.










DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3




Template Point Controls are used to override the normal horizontal and vertical locations of template points during the modeling process. Design examples include lane widening, ramp and intersection design, superelevation, and divided highways with separate grade lines.

These overrides are accomplished by assigning template point names to alignments or surface features. The assigned template points will follow the alignments or surface features using horizontal and/or vertical controls within a specified station range.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Point Control Commands

Point Control Commands

Point Controls are used to assign horizontal and/or vertical controls to template points. Point controls are added to the design after the corridor is created and the template drops are assigned to the corridor. Point controls are specified by the corridor’s alignment stationing, and not by the stationing on the controlling alignment. Point controls automatically override all template point constraints on the point being controlled. Constraints on all other points are obeyed.

Point Controls Basic Workflow

• Select Corridor > Point Controls.

• Select the template point name you want to control.

• Select whether you want to control the point horizontally, vertically or both using the Mode option.

• Select the corridor’s horizontal stationing limits where the control is being applied.

• Select the appropriate horizontal and/or vertical alignment which is controlling the specified template point.

• Click Add. Repeat these steps for each control point.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Assign Horizontal Control





3 Type Point Controls in the Corridor Name field.




2 Browse to the Templates folder and select the template named Two‐lane.

3 In the Station field, type 150+00 [15+000].


Create Point Controls

1 Select Corridor > Point Controls.

2 Select LT_EOP from the Point list.

3 Set the Mode to Horizontal.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


4 Set the Control Type to Alignment.

5 Select Offset from the Horizontal Alignment list.

6 Click Add, then click Close.

The offset alignment widens the two‐lane roadway to three lanes between stations 225+92.38 to 245+92.38 [17+314.16 to 17+923.76].


1 Select Process All and review the design, especially between 225+00 and 246+00 [17+300 and 18+000].

You should see the roadway widen on the left side of the centerline.

2 Select Corridor > Create Surface.

3 Type Finished in the Name field.

4 Select the Preference named Finished Surface.

5 Select the Feature check box in the Display in Plan View area.


7 Review the transition graphics in the CAD file.

Save the Roadway Design and Design Surface

1 Select File > Save.

2 Save the surface Final to the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Template Point Controls\Practice\ folder.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Understand template point controls.

• Create horizontal and vertical controls.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 Which of the following types of controls can be directly used to define a Point Control? (Select all that apply)

A – Horizontal Alignment

B – Vertical Alignment

C – Surface/DTM Feature

D – Graphics from a CAD file

E – Template point on another corridor

2 True or False: Template point controls are used to override the normal horizontal and vertical locations of template points during the modeling process.

• True

• False



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 Which of the following types of controls can be directly used to define a Point Control? (Select all that apply)

All Point controls except D can be defined from alignments, surface features, and template points, but they cannot be directly defined from graphic elements. The graphic element must be imported into an alignment or surface feature first.

2 True or False: Template point controls are used to override the normal horizontal and vertical locations of template points during the modeling process.

True Template point controls are used to override the normal horizontal and vertical locations of template points during the modeling process.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

20 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Use the Roadway Designer to create a divided roadway where the grade line of each roadway is different. Create and review the final design surface.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Template Point Controls\Task\I‐598 Reconstruction.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Template Point Controls\Task\Task ‐ Template Point Controls.rwk.



Geometry Project: I‐598 Reconstruction.alg





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Create a divided roadway where the grade line of each roadway is different.

Hint – When opening the files take a look at the Alignments and the Template to get a good understanding of the project. Create the corridor using the I‐598 EB alignment.

• Review the template named four‐lane divided. It includes two 12’ [3.6 m] lanes with 10’ [3.0 m] shoulders (improved from 6’ [2.0 m] on inside).

• Create a roadway design of a divided roadway (EB and WB lanes) with different grade lines.

• I‐598 EB is the primary corridor alignment.

• Starting station 266+25.87 [26+625.87].

• Ending station 288+50 [27+304].

• Template Drop Interval is 5’ [1.5 m].

• Use the following alignments to control specific template points as shown on the Project Details illustration on the following pages. I‐598 WB, Median Ditch, EB Outside Shoulder

• Create the design surface.

• Create cross sections and review the design. Cross Sections Right Offset: 200 feet [60 m].


Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Project Details

Project Details

Legend # AlignmentName

DESCRIPTION TYPE OF CONTROL

1.I‐598 EB EB Inside Edge of

PavementControlling corridor alignment

2.Median Ditch Bottom of

Median DitchHorizontal and Vertical

3.I‐598 WB WB Inside Edge

of PavementHorizontal and Vertical

4.

EB Outside Shoulder EB Outside

Shoulder Horizontal



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Superelevation

In this module you will learn to apply superelevation to specific segments of the roadway template, control shoulder slopes, and generate a superelevation report.

Dec‐2011 Superelevation


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn to apply superelevation and rollover locks.

• Create superelevation and rollover locks.


Superelevation Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Superelevation\Practice\.


Open Project File



2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Superelevation\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ Superelevation.rwk, then click Open.










DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Superelevation Terminology



Crown – The highest point of a roadway; the crown point can be (depending on design specifications) the point the roadway pivots about during superelevation.

Left and Right Range Point – The limits of the Superelevation section. The superelevation normally does not include the shoulders.

Cross Slope – The transverse slope between the Crown and left or right Range Point.

Superelevation Section – A named portion of the road being superelevated defined using the Create Superelevation Wizard.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



Normal Crown – The normal cross section of the road when the road is not being superelevated.

Zero Cross Slope – When the high side of the superelevated roadway has a zero cross slope between the Crown Point and the high side Range Point.

Reverse Crown – When the high side cross slope equals the low side Normal Crown cross slope.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



Full Super – When the cross slope reaches its maximum superelevation.

Super Runoff – The length of the transition between the Zero Cross Slope and Full Super.

Super Runout – The length of the transition between the Normal Crown and Zero Cross Slope.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



A superelevation section is a named portion of the road which is being superelevated. It is defined by using the Create Superelevation Wizard. A given Corridor can have one or many superelevation sections.

For each superelevation section, you define a name, then select the crown point, the left and right range point, and the pivot point. In a divided highway scenario, where you have two different pivot points, two superelevation sections are created. The superelevation wizard will create controls lines which belong to each section, thus allowing the points to move vertically about the specified pivot point(s).



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Creating Superelevation

Creating Superelevation

Superelevation is created and applied using the Roadway Designer, after the corridor is created and template drops are assigned. Superelevation is stored and saved in the roadway design file (.ird), and is applied to a corridor.

The Create Superelevation wizard is used to create superelevation. When superelevation is created, superelevation point controls are automatically created and are added to the Points Control dialog. Superelevation point controls are vertical controls. As in normal point controls, superelevation point controls automatically override template point constraints.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Superelevation Wizard

Superelevation Wizard

The Create Superelevation wizard walks you through the steps necessary to create and apply superelevation to the corridor. Select Superelevation > Create Superelevation Wizard > Table to start the wizard. This brings up the Table Wizard dialog. It is important to understand that the wizard cannot be used to edit any previously created superelevation.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Table Wizard

Table Wizard

The Table Wizard dialog is used to input superelevation data such as the name, location of the superelevation rate table, and the parameters that relate to the superelevation transition. The rate table is an ASCII file containing superelevation rates and transition lengths based on design speed. The table has the default extension of .sup. An example of a rate table is shown on the next page.

Basic Workflow

• Select the appropriate superelevation table name and location by selecting Browse next to the Table field.

• Set up the appropriate superelevation transitioning parameters.

• Click Load Values From Table.

• Click Next >.

This displays the Superelevation Section Definitions dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Table Wizard

* BENTLEY SYSTEMS INROADS SUPERELEVATION RATE TABLE

*

* Design Speed

70.000

*

*2‐lane 4‐lane

* Deg Crv Radius Super Rate spl lgt spl_lgt

*

0^15'00.000" 22918.000 nc 0.000 0.000

0^30'00.000" 11459.000 rc 200.000 200.000

0^45'00.000" 7639.000 .026 200.000 200.000

1^00'00.000" 5730.000 .033 200.000 200.000

1^30'00.000" 3820.000 .046 200.000 200.000

2^00'00.000" 2865.000 .055 200.000 230.000

2^30'00.000" 2292.000 .059 200.000 260.000



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create a New Corridor





3 Type Superelevation in the Corridor Name field.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3




2 Browse to the Templates folder and select the Two‐lane template.

3 Type 150+00 [15+000] in the Station field.

4 Type 20’ [5 m] in the Interval field.


Create Superelevation Wizard and Select Table

1 Select Superelevation > Create Superelevation Wizard > Table.

This displays the Table Wizard dialog.

2 Click the Browse button next to the Table field to select and open the rate table named 06_60.sup [06_120k.sup] from the C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Superelevation\Practice\ folder.

3 Click Load Values From Table in the Table Wizard dialog.

Review the superelevation rates.

4 Click Next >.

This displays the Superelevation Section Definitions dialog.

5 Leave the Superelevation Section Definitions dialog OPEN. It will be used in the next exercise.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Superelevation Section


Superelevation Section Definitions Dialog

The Superelevation Section Definitions dialog is used to specify which pavement sections to superelevate, based on a cross section view. These sections are named during the process.

On a two‐lane roadway, only one section is needed. Multiple sections are used for divided roadways.

When specifying pavement sections, the Crown Point, Left and Right Range Points are selected. These points can be selected directly from the cross section view or from their respective drop‐down lists.

The Crown Point is normally the centerline of a two‐lane roadway, but it can be any point where the pavement breaks slope.

Range Points mark the portion of the roadway that will be superelevated. Shoulders are considered to be the next segments past the extent of the Range Points and are typically not included when selecting the Range Points.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


The Pivot Direction is the location of the point the superelevation is pivoted about.

Basic Workflow

• Click Add in the Superelevation Sections Definitions dialog. This displaysthe Add Superelevation Section dialog.

• Enter the name of the superelevation section.

• Select the Crown Point, Left Range Point, and Right Range Point using the drop‐down lists or by selecting the points using Target located next to each field. If using Target, click on the cross section view window to select the appropriate points.

• Select the Pivot Direction from the drop‐down list.

• Select the Number of Lanes and the appropriate Station Limits, if any. If you do not select Station Limits, superelevation will be applied to the entire corridor.

• Select OK.

• Repeat these steps on all sections.

• Click Next; this displays the Superelevation Controls dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Superelevation Controls

Superelevation Controls

Superelevation Controls Dialog

The Superelevation Controls dialog shows the names of the point controls that will be created. The names can be changed by selecting the Edit button. This is also where you can set the station rounding by using the Round Station to Nearest option. Station rounding allows you to round superelevation stations up or down. For example, instead of the full superelevation station being computed as 245+45.96, it could be rounded to nearest foot [meter] (245+46.00) using a rounding value of 0+01.00.

Basic Workflow

• Review and edit the superelevation point controls.

• Set the Round Station to Nearest option and select the rounding value, if station rounding is desired.

• Click Next>. If there are superelevation overlaps, this displays the Fix Superelevation Overlap dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create a Superelevation Section


Continue working on the last practice activity.

The Superelevation Section Definitions dialog should still be displayed from the last practice activity.

Create Superelevation Section Definitions

1 Click Add in the Superelevation Section Definitions dialog.

The Add Superelevation Section dialog opens.

2 Type Two‐lane Superelevation for the Name of the section.

3 Use the Target button next to the Crown Point field and click the centerline point on the Cross Section view.

This returns the Crown Point name as CL.

4 Use the Target button next to the Left Range Point field and click the left edge of pavement point on the Cross Section view.

This returns the Left Range Point name as LT_EOP.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


5 Use the Target button next to the Right Range Point field and click the right edge of pavement point on the Cross Section view.

This returns the Right Range Point name as RT_EOP.

6 The Pivot Direction should be set to From Crown Point.

7 The Number of Lanes should be set to Two.

8 Station Limits should be cleared, which will result in superelevating the entire corridor.

9 Click OK.

Review the Superelevation Controls

1 Review the information in the Superelevation Section Definitions dialog.

2 Click Next>.

This displays the Superelevation Controls dialog.

3 Review the information in the Superelevation Controls dialog.

4 Select the Round Station to Nearest option and set the rounding value to 0+01.00 [0+001].

5 Click Finish.

There is an overlap in the computed superelevation so the Fix Superelevation Overlap dialog opens so the overlap can be corrected. The superelevation cannot be saved until the overlap is corrected.

6 Leave the Fix Superelevation Overlap dialog OPEN. We will use it in the next exercise.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Fixing Overlap

Fixing Overlap

Fix Superelevation Overlap Dialog

The Fix Superelevation Overlap dialog is used to resolve superelevation overlaps. It appears automatically if there is a superelevation overlap. An overlap occurs when there is not enough distance to fit the superelevation transition lengths between curves, or the corridor alignment starts or ends in a superelevation transition.

Superelevation overlaps can be resolved by either shifting the transition length onto the next curve or previous curve, or by reducing the total transition length.

To shift the transition, enter the distance you want to shift the transition in the Shift Transition Onto Curve by fields for the Previous Curve or Next Curve. The % Runoff on Curve and % Transition on Curve are used for readout only and will show you Runoff and Total Transition percentages on the curves as you shift the transitions.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Fixing Overlap

To reduce the total transition length, enter the transition length reduction in the Reduce Transition Length by fields, located in the Previous Curve area or Next Curve areas. The new length is reflected in the New Length field. You must move the cursor to another field or use the Tab key to update the length value.

The New Length field can also be used to specify the new reduced length, without using the Reduce Transition Length by field, producing the same results.

The diagram at the top of the dialog dynamically displays the overlaps and the results of shift and changing the transition lengths. Clicking on the diagram and holding down the left mouse button allows you to dynamically slide the transitions.

Basic Workflow

• To shift the transition onto a curve, enter the shift distance in the Shift Transition Onto Curve by fields.

• To reduce the transition length, enter the transition length reduction in the Reduce Transition Length by fields.

• Click Apply.

• Click Next> to move to the next overlap, if necessary.

• Repeat for all overlaps.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Correcting a Superelevation Overlap


Continue working on the last practice activity.

The Fix Superelevation Overlap dialog should still be displayed from the last practice activity.

Reduce the Transition Length

1 Review the superelevation overlap in the Fix Superelevation Overlap dialog.

2 Reduce the total transition length of the first curve by typing 45.00’ [25 m] in the Reduce Transition Length by field in the Previous Curve area.

Shift the Transition

1 Shift the transition onto the second curve by typing 45.00’ [25 m] in the Shift Transition Onto Curve by field in the Next Curve area.


Review the Point Controls

1 Select Corridor > Point Controls and review the new point controls relating to superelevation.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


2 Select Close on the Point Controls dialog.

Review the Superelevation

1 Select the Superelevation radio button located on the bottom right corner of the Roadway Designer dialog.

The superelevation diagram is displayed in a new superelevation view along with the plan, profile, and cross section views.

2 Select Process All.

Review how the superelevation is displayed in the plan, profile, and cross section views. You will learn about this color coding in the next section.

3 Select File > Save.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Viewing the Superelevation

Viewing the Superelevation

After superelevation is created using the Create Superelevation wizard, you can view it in a new window in the Roadway Designer by selecting the Superelevation radio button. The Superelevation radio button can be set at any time during the design. To return to the normal plan, profile, cross section views, select the Normal radio button. These windows are used to review and edit the superelevation. The display of each window is color‐coded.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Superelevation Colors

Superelevation Colors

When the Display Mode is set to Superelevation, color‐coded cross slopes are displayed in the Plan, Profile, and Cross Section View windows. This allows you to visualize the slopes as the roadway transitions through superelevated areas.

Slopes to the right that are between 0.5% and 10% will start as green and transition to blue as the slope approaches 10%. When the slope is greater than 10% to the right, the color becomes dark blue.

Slopes to the left that are between 0.5% and 10% will start as yellow and transition to red as the slope approaches 10%. When the slope is greater than 10% to the left, the color becomes dark red.

Slopes that are less than 0.5% will appear as a white color on either side of the pivot point.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Superelevation Plan View Window

Superelevation Plan View Window

The Superelevation Plan View window is located in the upper left corner of the Roadway Designer dialog. When the Display Mode is set to Superelevation, the transitions are color‐coded with respect to cross slope. End conditions are not shown in this view. All the views have zoom function and are linked to the data.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Superelevation Cross Section View Window

Superelevation Cross Section View Window

The Superelevation Cross Section View window is located in the lower left corner of the Roadway Designer dialog. When the Display Mode is set to Superelevation, the cross section slopes are color‐coded and labeled. The crown points, left, and right range points are also labeled. The shoulder slopes are only labeled when Shoulder Rollover Locks are applied. End conditions are not shown in this view.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Superelevation Profile View Window

Superelevation Profile View Window

The Superelevation Profile View window is located in the upper right corner of the Roadway Designer dialog. When the Display Mode is set to Superelevation, pavement lines are projected to the profile and are color‐coded with respect to the transverse slope.

Right‐click on the Profile View window to select which pavement lines to view.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Superelevation Diagram View Window

Superelevation Diagram View Window

The Superelevation Diagram View window is located in the lower right corner of the Roadway Designer dialog. It displays superelevation control lines. The control lines are colored‐coded for identification purposes only and are not related to slopes. The window also shows the location of the corridor’s alignment cardinal stations.

To edit the superelevation points, double‐click on any point on the Diagram View to change stations, cross slopes and superelevation types. Superelevation points have constraints, like template points. Editing a constrained superelevation point may affect the location of the other points in the diagram. What you are able to edit depends on which point you select and the constraints on that point.

Another technique for editing superelevation is the Edit Curve Set Stations command. To access the command, right‐click on the Superelevation Diagram View window and select Edit Curve Set Stations. The Edit Curve Set Stations shows the superelevation stations and slopes in a tabular form, and allows you to edit superelevation stations and slopes.

More detailed information on superelevation editing is available in other Bentley Institute training courses.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Shoulder Rollover Locks

Shoulder Rollover Locks

Shoulder rollover locks are used to limit the slope difference between the travel portion of the roadway and the adjacent shoulders during superelevation. This difference is the algebraic difference between the slopes as a percentage. For example, if the cross slope of the travel portion of the road is ‐2.0% and the shoulder is ‐6.0%, then the algebraic difference between the slopes is 4.0%.

Superelevation rollover locks are applied after the superelevation has been defined. The limit is set on the high side and low side of the roadway, and is input as an algebraic percentage. When the limit is reached, the travel portion of the roadway and shoulder will move together holding the limiting percentage difference between the roadway and shoulder.

As with superelevation, shoulder rollover locks produce template point controls that automatically override template point constraints. These will show up in the Point Control dialog after the shoulder rollover locks are created.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Example ‐ No Shoulder Rollover

Example ‐ No Shoulder Rollover

Assume, for example, that the road cross slope is 2% and the shoulder is 6%. If no shoulder rollover is applied, the slope of the shoulder will not change, thus remaining at 6% throughout the superelevation transition. This results in the condition shown in the above illustration.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Example ‐ Applying Shoulder Rollover


Given a road cross slope of 2% with a shoulder of 6% when in normal crown, applying a high side difference of 6.0% will lock the road and shoulder together when the roadway slope is 0% or greater. Applying a 0% slope difference on the low side will lock the road and the shoulder together when the roadway slope is 6% or greater. This results in the condition shown in the above illustration.

Multiple Shoulder Rollover

When applying rollover with only one shoulder, it is important to note that the algebraic difference in grade specified applies to the segment immediately preceding the range point and the shoulder segment directly outside the range point. When additional shoulder segments exist outside the range point (a paved and unpaved shoulder, for example) the algebraic difference in grade applied is between the two shoulder segments, not the original roadway.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Rollover Criteria

In order to use the Apply Shoulder Rollover command, the following criteria must be met.

• It must be a point that has not been superelevated.

• It is next to a point that has been superelevated or is a pivot point for superelevation.

• It is not a pivot point of the adjacent superelevated point.

• It is not an End Condition point.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Shoulder Rollover Locks Basic Workflow

Shoulder Rollover Locks Basic Workflow

Basic Workflow

• Create superelevation using the Create Superelevation wizard.

• Select Superelevation > Apply Shoulder Rollover Lock. This displays the Apply Shoulder Rollover Lock dialog.

• Select the Shoulder Point from the drop‐down list.

• Enter the Difference for the High Side and Low Side of the shoulders.

• Click Apply.

• Repeat this for each shoulder.

• Click the Process All button and review the design.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Shoulder Rollover


Continue working on the last exercise.

Apply Rollover Locks

1 Select Superelevation > Apply Shoulder Rollover Lock.

2 Select LT_SHDR in the Shoulder Point field.

3 Type LT_SHDR Rollover in the Control Line Name field.

4 Type 5.0% in the High Side Difference field and leave the Low Side Difference at 0%.

5 Click Apply.

This will automatically change the Shoulder Point from LT_SHDR to LT_GUTTER because LT_GUTTER is the next point outside LT_SHDR.

6 Change the Shoulder Point to RT_SHDR.

7 Type RT_SHDR Rollover in the Control Line Name field.

8 Leave the High Side Difference set at 5.0% and the Low Side Difference set at 0.00%.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Review the Points Controls

1 Select Corridor > Point Controls and review the new point controls relating to superelevation.

2 Click Close on the Point Controls dialog.

Review the Design

1 Process All and review the design.

2 Save the roadway design.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Superelevation Reports

Superelevation Reports

Superelevation Report Workflow

To create a superelevation report, select Superelevation > Superelevation Report. This brings up the Roadway Design Superelevation Report dialog.

Select the superelevation control points to report on in the Roadway Design Superelevation Report dialog and click Apply. This brings up the View XML Reports dialog. From this dialog, you can save and print the superelevation reports.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Superelevation Report

Exercise ‐ Superelevation Report

Continue working on the corridor named Superelevation.

Create Superelevation Report

1 Select Superelevation > Superelevation Report.

The Roadway Design Superelevation Report dialog opens.

2 Select the Report At All Processed Stations option.

3 Click All to select all of the Superelevation Points.

4 Click Apply.

The Bentley Report Browser dialog opens.

5 Review the report.

6 Close the Bentley Report Browser dialog.

7 Close the Roadway Design Superelevation Report dialog.





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Understand superelevation and rollover locks.

• Create superelevation and rollover locks.

• Create a design model of a superelevated roadway.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 True or False: Superelevation is created and applied using the Roadway Designer before the corridor is created and template drops are assigned.

• True

• False

2 Which Tool is used to walk you through creating and applying superelevation?

A – Corridor Modeling

B – Roadway Designer

C – Create Superelevation Wizard

D – Draw Cross Sections from Surfaces

3 True or False: The Superelevation Section Definitions dialog is used to specify the pavement sections to superelevate, based on a cross section view.

• True

• False

4 Superelevation overlaps can be resolved using which method? (Select all that apply)

A – Shifting the total transition length onto the next or previous curve.

B – Reducing the total transition length.

5 True or False: Superelevation can be imported from an ASCII file.

• True

• False



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 True or False: Superelevation is created and applied using the Roadway Designer before the corridor is created and template drops are assigned.

False – Superelevation is created and applied using the Roadway Designer after the corridor is created and template drops are assigned.

2 Which Tool is used to walk you through creating and applying superelevation?

C – The Create Superelevation Wizard walks you through creating and applying superelevation.

3 True or False: The Superelevation Section Definitions dialog is used to specify the pavement sections to superelevate, based on a cross section view.

True – The Superelevation Section Definitions dialog is used to specify the pavement sections to superelevate, based on a cross section view.

4 Superelevation overlaps can be resolved using which method?

Both:A – Shifting the total transition length onto the next or previous curve.

B – Reducing the total transition length.

5 True or False: Superelevation can be imported from an ASCII file.

True – Yes, superelevation can be imported from an ASCII file.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

60 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Use the Roadway Designer to create a superelevated divided roadway with a median barrier. Create and review the final design surface.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Superelevation\Task\I‐591 Reconstruction.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Superelevation\Task\Task ‐ Superelevation.rwk.


Additional Project Data

• Other alignments are controlling.

• Shoulders narrow over bridge.

• Notice that NB_CL and SB_CL are included in the Superelevation Point Controls because the superelevation range spans across them.







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Create a superelevated divided roadway with a median barrier.

Hint – This project requires 2 superelevation sections with one being NB and the other being SB. The Crown Point may be the same point used for a Range Point.

• Create a corridor using the alignment I‐591 Reconstruction and the following parameters.

• Template named four‐lane divided.

• Template drop interval of 5’ [1.5 m].

• The starting station is 356+34.25 [35+634.25] and the ending station is 376+50 [36+245].

• The Shoulders are narrowed in the area of the bridge located at approximately station 372+00 [36+110]. The shoulder tapers are defined using the alignment shown on the Project Task Details drawing on the following pages.

• Define superelevation using the following parameters.

• Design Speed is 75 MPH [120 kph].

• Pivot superelevation around the inside edges of pavement.

• Shoulder Rollover on Outside Shoulders.

• High Side Difference is 4%.

• Low Side Difference is 0%.

• No Shoulder Rollover applied on Inside Shoulders.

• Overlaps due to corridor not being long enough should be ignored.



Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Project Task Details

Project Task Details

Legend # AlignmentName

TYPE OF CONTROL

1.I‐591 Reconstruction Controlling corridor

alignment

2.

I‐591 NB Shoulder Taper

Taper Horizontal

3.I‐591 SB Shoulder Taper

Taper Horizontal



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Design Changes

This module explores how to edit templates and end conditions already associated with a corridor design. It also explores how to override template constraints with parametric constrains which allow maximum flexibility in your templates. Finally, you will learn how the Roadway Designer interface communicates changes to the templates through the use of colored text in the dialog boxes.

Dec‐2011 Design Changes


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn to implement Design Changes.

• Apply Design Changes.


Design Changes Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Design Changes\Practice\.


Open Project File



2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Design Changes\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ Design Changes.rwk, then click Open.










DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Template Library Synchronization

Template Library Synchronization

When a template is applied to a station using the Template Drops command, the template is copied from the template library to the Roadway Designer. Templates can be revised in the Roadway Designer or in the template library. This allows you to make minor changes to a template directly in the Roadway Designer without affecting the template library. Up to this point, we have revised all the templates in the template library.

In the Template Drops dialog, there are indicators that tell you if the template has been revised and whether the template matches the one in the template library.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Template Drop Indicators

Template Drop Indicators

The Template Drops area of the dialog shows template names and the station where that template is applied. In addition, the Revised In column indicates where the template was edited: the IRD or the ITL.

In addition to this basic information, the dialog uses color‐coding that represents various conditions of the template drop.

If the Station is red, that station does not exist in the corridor’s alignment.

If the Template Name is red you know that the template stored in the Roadway Designer does not match the template stored in the Template Library. The Revised column described below will tell you if the Roadway Designer or the Template Library has been edited.

If the Template Name is blue, that template does not exist in the template library.

If the IRD or ITL is red in the Revised column, the template has been edited in the Roadway Designer or the template library respectively, and is not the one originally used to add that template drop.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Synchronize with Library Button

Synchronize with Library Button

The Synchronize with Library button is used to update the template stored in the roadway design file with the template stored in the template library. This is normally done when a change is made to a template in the template library and that change is needed in a previously created roadway design. To synchronize a template, highlight a template drop and click the Synchronize with Library button.

The Edit button is used to revise a template saved in the roadway design file. It brings up the Create Template dialog. This is normally done when a minor change is made to the roadway design template and you don’t want to commit that change to the template in the template library.

If you edit or synchronize a template, the template transitions that use that template may need to be re‐established.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Synchronizing the Roadway Design File


Continue working with the design file SR 2067 Bypass.dgn.

Revise Template Library


2 Select Tools > Options.

3 Select the Apply Affixes check box.

4 Type the following in the Prefix fields:

Left Prefix: LT_

Right Prefix: RT_

5 Click OK on the Template Options dialog.


7 Navigate to the Templates folder and double‐click the Four‐lane template.

The Four‐lane template becomes the current template and is shown in the Current Template Window.

8 Delete the end condition components on the right side of the template.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


9 Navigate to the End Conditions folder and drag and drop the Fill Ditch template to the RT_OUTSIDE_SHDR point.

10 Test the end conditions.

11 Close the Test End Conditions dialog.

12 Double‐click the Two‐lane template to set it as the active template.

13 Delete the end condition components on the right side of the template.

14 Navigate to the End Conditions folder and drag and drop the Fill Ditch template to the RT_OUTSIDE_SHDR point.

15 Save the template library.


Synchronize Roadway Design with Template Library



Notice that the Two‐lane and Four‐lane templates are red, indicating that the template stored in the template library and the template stored in the Roadway Designer do not match.

3 Highlight the entry in the current template drops setting that uses the Four‐lane template.

Notice the thumbnail shows the simple cut and fill on the right side of the template.

4 Click Synchronize with Library.

Notice the Fill Ditch end conditions on the right side of the template now appear.

5 Highlight the entry that uses the Two‐lane template.

6 Click Synchronize with Library.


The template transitions may need to be verified again because the template has been updated.

8 If the template transition area is dark blue, the transition definition is still valid and no updates are required. However, if the template transition area is yellow, the transition must be updated. Double‐click the transition area and update the template transitions.

Remember that the two OUTSIDE_EOP points have to be edited so that they have only a slope constraint, instead of being fully constrained.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


9 Click Process All.





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Template Revisions in the Roadway Designer

Template Revisions in the Roadway Designer

To revise a template saved in the Roadway Designer, select Corridor > Template Drops. Highlight the template in the Current Template Drops section of the dialog and click Edit. This displays the Create Template dialog. Edit the template in the Create Template dialog and click OK. All changes to the template are stored in the roadway design file and the template library is not changed.

If a modification is desired for an individual station along the corridor, double‐click the Cross Section View window when that station is displayed. This displays the Create Template dialog. Edit the template in the Create Template dialog and click OK. All changes to the template are stored in the roadway design file and the template library is not changed. The edited station is added to the Template Drops dialog as single station template drop assignment. The modified station is also displayed as a green line in the Plan View window. Single station modifications are normally done when the design is nearing completion and only minor refinements are desired.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Revising a Template


Continue working with the files from the previous exercise.

Revise a Template using the Template Drops Dialog


2 Select the Two‐lane template in the Current Template Drops portion of the Template Drops dialog.

3 Click Edit.

Change the Shoulder Width

1 Edit the RT_OUTSIDE_SHDR point and change Horizontal Constraint Value to 8.00’ [2.5 m].


3 Click OK on the Create Template dialog.

4 Review the Template Drops dialog.

Notice the template is now revised in the IRD and the template is red.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


6 If the transition area is dark blue (all points connected and reviewed) skip to the Revise a Template at an Individual Station section below; otherwise continue.

7 If the transition area is yellow (missing transition connection) double‐click the transition area on the Plan View of the Roadway Designer dialog.

8 Click OK to move to the Edit Transition Midpoint dialog.

9 Right click on the RT_OUTSIDE_SHDR point and select Delete Horizontal Constraint.

10 Test the transition.

11 Click OK.

This allows the shoulder to transition from 10.00’ to 8.00’ [3.0 m to 2.5 m] during the transition.

Revise a Template at an Individual Station

1 Navigate to station 206+50 [16+720] in the Cross Section View Window.

2 Double‐click the Cross Section View window.

This displays the Create Template dialog.

Notice that the name of the dialog box is Editing Template at Station 206+50 Only [Editing Template at Station 16+720 Only].


4 Click the X: Y: button in the Dynamic Setting dialog.

This changes the readout to X: Slope:.

5 Set the following:

6 Click the Set Dynamic Origin button and click the LT_OUTSIDE_SHDR point on the template.

7 Right‐click on the LT_FILL2 point and select Move Point.

8 Move the LT_FILL2 point along the ground surface until the Dynamic Settings readout says 25%, then zoom in close to the existing ground and you should see that the slope will tie to the ground automatically. Left click to save the new point.

X Step: 0.01

Slope Step: 1.00%



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


9 Right‐click on the CL point, then select Move Point.

Notice that the newly modified slope does not stay at 25% as you move your cursor.


11 Right‐click on the LT_FILL2 point again and select Add Constraint > Slope.

12 Click on the LT_OUTSIDE_SHDR point, and click OK on the Add Slope Constraint dialog (25.0% slope).

13 Right‐click on the CL point, then select Move Point.

Now you should notice that the newly modified slope does stay at 25% as you move your cursor.


15 Click OK on the Editing Template at Station 206+50 [16+720] Only dialog.

Review the Design


2 Close the Results dialog, and review the design.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

End Condition Exceptions

End Condition Exceptions

End condition exceptions are used to override end conditions along a range of corridor stations. Select Corridor > End Condition Exceptions to activate the command. This brings up the End Condition Exceptions dialog. Enter the station range and specify which side of the road is being overridden. Click Edit to edit the end condition. This brings up a dialog box similar to the Create Template dialog. However, the dialog shows only the end conditions on the specified override side. All other non‐end condition components are shown as dashed lines. Override the end condition using the familiar Create Template tools.

Sometimes the end conditions are not desired in the design, for example, when the corridor passes through an intersection or crosses a bridge. To eliminate end conditions for a range of stations, create an end condition exception and select the Backbone Only option.

End condition exceptions are displayed in the Plan View window as a cyan‐colored shape. You can double‐click the shape to access the End Condition Exceptions dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ End Condition Exceptions



Create an End Condition Exception

1 Select Corridor > End Condition Exceptions.

2 In the Station Range area, type 188+00 [16+150] in the Start: field and 200+00 [16+530] in the Stop: field.

3 Select the Apply to Left Override check box.

4 Click Add, then Edit.

This displays the Left Override – 188+00 to 200+00 [Left Override – 16+150 to 16+530] dialog.

5 Right‐click on the left fill slope (which will be a cyan‐colored line) and select Delete Component.

Notice that the LT_FILL2 point disappears.

6 Navigate to the End Conditions folder and select the Fill Ditch template.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


7 Drag the Fill Ditch template from the Preview Window and right‐click, with the left mouse button still held down.

8 Select Reflect.

9 Move the Fill Ditch end condition to the LT_OUTSIDE_SHDR point (the point becomes a bold white plus sign) and click.

10 Click OK.

11 Click Close on the End Condition Exceptions dialog.

Notice the end condition exception displays in the Plan View window as a light blue shaded area.

Review and Save Roadway Design


2 Close the Results dialog, and review the design.





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Parametric Constraints

Parametric Constraints

Parametric constraints are used to override constraint values. For example, you create a template with a 2 inch [50 mm] layer of asphalt, but the design calls for 3 inches [75 mm]. The 2 inches [50 mm] is a vertical constraint value that can be overridden to 3 inches [75 mm] using parametric constraints. To create parametric constraints, first Edit the template points and type a name in the Labels field that you want to assign to a specific constraint value. For pavement thickness, it would be the vertical constraint of the bottom layer points. Next, use Tools > Parametric Constraints to assign overriding values to the labeled points.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Using a Parametric Constraint



Labeling Constraint Values


2 Navigate to the Templates folder and double‐click the Two‐lane template.

3 Double‐click the LT_OUTSIDE_SHDR_BOT point.


4 Under Constraint 1 (which is the vertical constraint), type Thickness in the Label field.

5 Click Apply.

6 Click Next> twice.

The LT_OUTSIDE_EOP_BOT point should now be the selected point.

7 Change Constraint 2 (which is the vertical constraint), select Thickness as the Label.

8 Click Apply.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


After the Label has been entered once it can be selected from the list. Using the list ensures that there are no spelling differences between the Label names.

9 Repeat for the following points:

CL_BOT

RT_OUTSIDE_EOP_BOT

RT_OUTSIDE_SHDR_BOT

10 Close the Point Properties dialog.

11 Close the Create Template dialog and save the template library.

Assign Constraint Value Overrides



3 Select the Two‐lane template (station 188+00 [16+155] entry) and click Synchronize with Library.

A Warning dialog opens.

4 Click Yes on the Warning dialog.


6 Select Tools > Parametric Constraints.

7 Select the Constraint Label named Thickness.

8 Type a Start Value of ‐2.00 [‐0.6] and a Stop Value of ‐2.00 [‐0.6].

The pavement thickness will now be 2’ [0.6 m] instead of the default 0.83’ [0.25 m] in the area of the Two‐lane template. The Four‐lane template will still have a pavement thickness of 0.83’ [0.25 m] because the parametric labels were not assigned to that template.


10 If the template transition area is dark blue the transition definition is still valid and no updates are required. However, if the template transition area is yellow, the transition must be updated. Double‐click the transition area and update the template transitions.

Remember that the two OUTSIDE_EOP points have to be edited so that they have only a slope constraint, instead of being fully constrained.


12 Close the Results dialog and review the design.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Implement design changes.

• Apply design changes.

• Create an updated design model.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 True or False: When a template is applied to a station using the Template Drops command, the template is copied from the template library to the roadway design.

• True

• False

2 Describe the Template Drop Indicators.

Station is red –

Template name is red –

Template name is blue –

Revised is red –

3 True or False: All changes to the template are stored in the roadway design file and the template library.

• True

• False

4 True or False: End Condition exceptions are used to override end conditions along a range of corridor stations.

• True

• False

5 True or False: Parametric constraints are used to override constraint values.

• True

• False



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 True or False: When a template is applied to a station using the Template Drops command, the template is copied from the template library to the roadway design.

True – When a template is applied to a station using the Template Drops command, the template is copied from the template library to the roadway design.

2 Describe the Template Drop Indicators.

Station is red – The station does not exist in the corridor’s alignment.

Template name is red – The template in the Roadway Designer does not match the template in the template library.

Template name is blue – The template does not exist in the template library.

Revised is red – A single station has been edited in the Roadway Designer or the template library and is not the one originally used to add that template drop.

3 True or False: All changes to the template are stored in the roadway design file and the template library.

False – Changes to the template are stored where the changes are made. Changes made in the Roadway Designer are stored in the Roadway Designer. Changes made in the Create Template tool are stored in the Template Library. The Synchronize with Library tool is used to bring the newest template from the template library into the Roadway Designer.

4 True or False: End Condition exceptions are used to over ride end conditions along a range of corridor stations.

True – End Condition exceptions override end conditions along a range of corridor stations.

5 True or False: Parametric constraints are used to override constraint values.

True – Parametric constraints are used to override constraint values. For example, a parametric constraint could be used to control variable pavement thickness or shoulder width from a single template.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

35 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Use the Roadway Designer to modify the I‐591 Reconstruction design. Create End Condition Exceptions to eliminate the fill slopes in the location of the existing bridge. Use Parametric Constraints to change the thickness of the pavement layer. Create and review the final design surface.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Design Changes\Task\I‐591 Reconstruction Changes.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Design Changes\Task\Task ‐ Design Changes.rwk.



Proposed Surface: Finished.dtm




Roadway Design: I‐591 Reconstruction Changes.ird



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Modify the I‐591 Reconstruction design.

• Create End Condition Exceptions to eliminate the fill slopes created on the existing bridge.

• NB Bridge Exception starts at station 370+60 [36+065] and ends at station 373+00 [36+155].

• SB Bridge Exception starts at station 371+15 [36+070] and ends at station 373+60 [36+160].

• Use parametric constraints to change the thickness of the pavement layer from 10” to 12” [250 mm to 300 mm] beginning at station 364+00 [35+865].

• Create a design surface.


Tips

• If calculating the End Area Volume, attempt to use Volume Exceptions in the area of the bridge.

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Cross Sections and Annotation

In this chapter, you will learn how to display and annotate cross sections.

Dec‐2011 Cross Sections and Annotation


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3




• Set up the project

• Define existing ground surface

• Defined the templates

• Created geometries

• Designed the roadway corridor

• Generated proposed surfaces

Now we are ready to evaluate the results, which will involve the following tasks:

• Create proposed cross sections

• Calculate end‐area volumes

• Generate reports

Cross Sections and Annotation Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Review how to create cross sections.

• Learn how to update cross sections.

• Learn how to annotate cross sections.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Cross Sections and Annotation\Practice\.

2 Select the file Create Cross Sections.dgn, then click Open.





2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Cross Sections and Annotation\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ Cross Sections and Annotation.rwk, then click Open.





Proposed Surface: Hemfield Finished.dtm


Template Library: Hemfield County Standards.itl

Roadway Design: Hemfield.ird



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Cross Section Creation



Before cross sections can be created, a baseline must be defined. This could come from either a horizontal alignment, a graphic line, or points selected in the graphic view.

To create cross sections of the existing ground surface or proposed surface, those surfaces must be opened.

Normally, the cross sections are cut perpendicular to the horizontal baseline; however, there are settings that will create skewed cross sections or even broken back cross sections. These are called custom cross sections.

Cross sections can be set up to be laid out in a large group or broken into sheets. Individual cross sections can also be created. An individual or group of cross sections, created at the same time, is called a “cross section set.”



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Surface Display

Surface Display

Surface Display

The surface line that is displayed on cross sections is based on the symbology associated with the surface. The symbology association is defined using the Surface Properties tool (Surface > Surface Properties).

If surface features are displayed on the cross section, the symbology of the feature is based on the Style associated with the surface feature.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Create Cross Section Dialog



The Create Cross Section dialog has an interface called a tree and leaf format. One folder (or stem) leads to either another folder (stem) or to a file (leaf).

• The General leaf displays the general settings for the tool. This includes the set name, cross section interval or distance between cross sections, the width left and right of the cross section, the vertical exaggeration used, and which surface or surfaces will be placed on the cross section.

• The Source leaf is used to select the horizontal control. For graphics and multipoint‐based alignments, a horizontal alignment can be created as the cross sections are generated. The alignment is needed if you want to update the cross sections in the future using the Update Cross Section tool.

• The Include leaf is used to add surface features, components, and storm and sanitary structures to the cross sections. Viewing components on the cross sections displays the template components on the cross sections.

• The Limits leaf found in the Controls stem is used to set either elevation limits or station limits for cross sections.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3



Create the Cross Sections

1 Select the Evaluation > Cross Section > Cross Sections.

2 Ensure the surfaces Hemfield Existing and Hemfield Finished are selected.

The Interval should be set at 50 [10], the Left Offset at ‐100.00 [‐40] and the Right Offset at 100.00 [40].

3 Enter Hemfield Road Option 2 for the Set Name.

4 Select the Include leaf and verify that the Components check box is selected and all other check boxes are cleared.

5 Click Apply.

6 Click above the existing ground cross sections in the CAD view to identify where the lower left point of the first cross section will be located in the CAD file.

7 Close the Cross Sections dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Review the Cross Sections

1 Fit the view.

2 Window Area on one of the cross sections.

Although windowing into the cross sections is functional, there is an easier way to view cross sections.


4 Change the Cross Section Set to Hemfield Road Option 2.

5 Select one of the stations listed.

The view is updated showing the selected cross section.

6 Select another station.

7 Select Station 27+50.00 [2+750].

8 In the Movie Mode section, set the Time to .3 and Click Run.

Each cross section is displayed one at a time in a movie mode.

9 When finished, close the Cross Section Viewer.

Change the Surface Properties


2 Select the Surface named Hemfield Existing.

3 Select the Advanced tab.

Notice that Hemfield Existing has E_SURF_OriginalGround as the symbology for cross sections.

4 Change the Surface to Hemfield Finished.

Notice that the symbology for both the profile and the cross sections is set to Default.

5 Change the symbology for both profile and cross sections to P_SURF_DesignSurface.

6 Click Apply.

The symbology associated with the surface has been updated. However, the cross sections will not automatically update. Next, we will learn how to update them.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


7 Close the Surface Properties dialog.

A change has just been made to the surface; it should be saved to the hard drive.

8 Save the surface. (Hint: File > Save).

Update the Cross Sections


2 In the Cross Sections dialog, select the Update Cross Section folder.

3 Set the Mode to Refresh.

Refresh will update all of the displayed surfaces on the cross section.


5 Select the Surfaces leaf.

6 Select the Surface named Hemfield Finished.

7 Click Apply.

Notice that the surface color changed for the finished surface.

Annotate the Cross Sections

1 In the Cross Sections dialog, select the Annotate Cross Section folder.



4 Select the Surface named Hemfield Finished.

5 Click Apply.

The surface Hemfield Finished in the cross sections is annotated.


7 Review the annotation of the cross section at station 25+00 [2+500].

Only surface data that is currently displayed on the cross sections can be annotated.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Custom Cross Section Sets



Custom cross section sets are configured using the Custom > General leaf. When a custom cross section set is created, some of the settings on the General and Include leafs are overridden by the settings on the Custom > General leaf. These settings include: Interval, Left and Right Offset, and Crossing and Projected Features.

A custom cross section set can include different Station Ranges, single Perpendicular stations, Skewed sections, and sections that follow a linestring.

The cross section set is only available during the current InRoads session unless it is saved. Custom cross section sets can be saved using the Save button located at the bottom of the Custom > General leaf. The Import button is used to retrieve a previously saved custom cross section set. The file extension for a custom cross section is .xsc.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create Custom Cross Sections


Creating a Custom Cross Section Set


2 In the Cross Sections dialog, select the Create Cross Section folder and select the General leaf.

3 Enter Hemfield Road Custom for the Set Name.

Add Two Station Ranges

1 Select the Custom > General leaf.

2 Set the Type to Station Range.

3 Enter 24+00 [2+400] for the Start Station.

4 Enter 30+00 [2+800] for the Stop Station.

5 Set the Interval to 100 [20].

6 Set the Left Offset to ‐100 [‐30].

7 Set the Right Offset to 100 [30].

8 Click Add.

9 Leave the Type set to Station Range.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


10 Enter 30+00 [2+800] for the Starting Station.

11 Enter 70+00 [3+200] for the Stop Station.

12 Change the Interval to 50 [10].

13 Click Add.

Add Three Skewed Sections

1 Change the Type to Skewed.

2 Enter 26+70 [2+774] for the Station.



5 Enter 11^00'00.0" for the Skew Angle.

6 Click Add.


8 Enter 5^00'00.0" for the Skew Angle.

9 Click Add.


11 Enter ‐9^00'00.0" for the Skew Angle.

12 Click Add.

Add Two Perpendicular Sections

1 Change the Type to Perpendicular.

2 Enter 48+34.78 [3+201] for the Station.



5 Click Add.

6 Enter 57+16.44 [3+357.88] for the Station.

7 Click Add.

Save the Custom Cross Section Set

1 Click Save As.

2 Change the Save In folder to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Cross Sections and Annotation\Practice\.

3 Enter Hemfield Custom.xsc for the File name.

4 Click Save on the Save As dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Enable the Planimetric and Planimetric Station Display

1 Select the Controls > Plan Display leaf.

2 In the Symbology section, select the Planimetric and Planimetric Station options.

Display the Cross Section Set

1 Click Apply.

2 When prompted to Identify Location, click above the previous cross section set.

3 Click Yes on the warning dialog that states “Using station limits may limit the custom set. Continue?”

4 Close the Create Cross Section dialog.

5 Review the plan view graphics.

Notice the different spacing between cross sections.

Locate the skewed cross sections.

View the Cross Sections


2 Change the Cross Section Set to Hemfield Road Custom.

3 Review the cross sections using the Cross Section Viewer dialog.

Notice that the Skewed cross sections are marked with an (S).

4 Close the Cross Section Viewer dialog.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Create cross sections

• Update cross sections

• Annotate cross sections

• Create custom cross sections



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 An individual or group of cross sections created at the same time is called a ________.

A – Cross section sheet

B – Cross section file

C – Cross section group

D – Cross section set

2 True or False: There is no way to save a custom cross section list.

• True

• False



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 An individual or group of cross sections, created at the same time, is called a ________.

D – Cross section set

2 True or False: There is no way to save a custom cross section list.

False – Custom cross sections can be saved by selecting Custom > General, clicking Save, and specifying a name for the file. The custom cross section list is then saved to an .xsc file.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

15 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Create cross sections showing the existing and design surface. Annotate the design surface on the cross sections.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Cross Sections and Annotation\Task\Meadow Park Working.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Cross Sections and Annotation\Task\Task ‐ Cross Sections and Annotation.rwk.





Proposed Surface: Meadow Park Finished.dtm

Template Library: Meadow Park City Standards.itl

Roadway Design: Meadow Park.ird



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Create cross sections showing the existing and design surface.

• Verify the existing ground surface cross section symbology is set to E_SURF_OriginalGround.

• Set the finished design surface cross section symbology to P_SURF_DesignSurface.

• Create cross sections at a 50‐foot [10M] interval starting at station 26+50 [1+885] along the horizontal alignment named Meadow Park Drive.

• Name the cross section set Meadow Park Option 2. Place these cross sections above the existing ground cross sections.

• Annotate the finished design surface of the cross section set called Meadow Park Option 2.

Questions

• What is the elevation of the left gutter flowline at station 32+00 [1+900]?

• How many closed components are displayed on each cross section?

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Introduction to Volumes

In this chapter, we will learn how to compute end‐area volumes from cross sections. We will also learn how to compute triangle volumes between two surfaces. We will generate reports of the volume computations.

Dec‐2011 Introduction to Volumes


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Generate end‐area volumes.

• Create volume reports.

• Learn about triangle volume.

Introduction to Volumes Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Volumes\Practice\.

2 Select the file Volumes.dgn, then click Open.





2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Volumes\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ Intro to Volumes.rwk, then click Open.











DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

End‐Area Volume

End‐Area Volume

End‐Area Volume

Although end‐area volumes can be inaccurate, they have traditionally been the preferred method of volume calculation. Why inaccurate? The volume calculation is based on two thin slices of the project; the areas of cut and fill at these two locations are assumed to be representative of every location between the two locations. The accuracy of the volume is only as good as the locations selected. So, if cross sections are created every 50 feet along an alignment, it is assumed that no significant changes in terrain occurred between the two cross sections.

Before computer‐aided assistance, end‐area volumes were a practical and reasonably accurate manual method of estimating volumes. The other volume calculation methods, such as differential elevations, required excessive manual calculations. Using cross sections, the contractor, engineer and owner could each manually estimate the volumes within an acceptable amount of error.

So, how does the calculation work? Find the area of cut on two adjacent cross sections, for example, station 12+00 and 12+50. Traditionally, the area was measured on a cross section drawing using a planimeter or by counting squares



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

End‐Area Volume

on a grid. Add the two areas together and divide by two to get the average of the two. Multiply that average area by the distance between the two cross sections to determine the cut volume. Repeat this process for the fill volume. The closer the cross sections are to each other, the more accurate the volume will be.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

End‐Area Volume Prerequisites



Cross sections are needed in the working CAD file. The cross sections must have at least two surfaces displayed. For component volumes, the template components must be displayed on the cross sections.

Since the basic end‐area calculation assumes a straight line, an option is available to correct for alignment curvature. If you use this option, the horizontal alignment on which the cross sections are based must be loaded in InRoads.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Surface Type

Surface Type

Surface Type

When the surface line is displayed on the cross section, there is some additional information associated with that line. One of the items associated with the surface line is the Surface Type. The Surface Type is used by InRoads when computing volumes. There are four possible Surface Types.

• Existing – used for existing ground surfaces

• Design – used for design surfaces

• Substratum – used for surfaces below the top of ground, such as an underground rock layer

• Ignore – instructs InRoads not to use the surface for end‐area calculations

• Subgrade – used to compute end area volumes that have a subgrade surface.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

End‐Area Volume Dialog



The End‐Area Volumes command is part of the Cross Sections dialog.

Multiple cross section sets can be displayed in a single CAD file. The End‐Area Volumes tool uses the cross section set name to specify which cross sections to calculate volumes for. The Cross Section Set selection box and graphical target button are used to specify the appropriate cross section set. When a cross section set is selected, a box is displayed around the set to identify it for processing.

The surfaces listed in the End‐Area Volumes dialog box are the ones on the cross sections. The surfaces (.dtm) do not need to be opened to compute end‐area volumes using that surface. The actual graphics are read to compute the end‐area volume.

Another option on the General leaf is an XML report that can be generated when the volumes are calculated.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Calculate End‐Area Volume


Calculate End‐Area Volume

1 Select Evaluation > Cross Section> Cross Sections.

2 Select the End Area Volume > General leaf.


4 Select both the Hemfield Existing and Hemfield Finished surfaces.

Note the type for each surface.

5 Select the Create XML Report check box.

6 Click Apply.

The volume report appears.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


If the message “You need to set the Style Sheet...” appears, click OK and proceed with step 7. Otherwise skip to step 8. This message indicates that the selected volume report type requires a default style sheet.

7 On the left side of the browser, open the Evaluation folder.

8 Select BasicVolume.xsl.

The .xsl file is a report template file that can be edited.


10 Close the Report Browser.


If you want BasicVolume.xsl to be the default format for all end‐area volume reports, right‐click on BasicVolume.xsl and select Set as Default End Area Volume.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Volume Reports

Volume Reports

Volume Reports

The InRoads XML reporting allows quick viewing of various report formats. Each of the .xsl files listed in the Evaluation folder are different volume report formats.

1 Try other volume report formats in the Evaluation folder and notice how the different formats can be displayed.

2 Close the Report Browser and the CrossSection tool.

3 Window into one of the cross sections.

Notice the volume calculation information that appears at the bottom of the cross sections.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Triangle Volumes

Triangle Volumes

Triangle Volumes

As noted before, end‐area volume is only as good as the frequency and accuracy of the cross sections.

Triangle volumes compare the triangles in both surfaces to compute the true difference between the surfaces. Unlike end‐area volumes, triangle volumes are not an estimate of the difference between surfaces. However, remember that even triangle volumes can only be as good as the surfaces they are measuring; surfaces approximate the terrain.

The Triangle Volume tool computes volumes directly from surfaces. Cross sections are not required. Similar to the end‐area volume calculations, the results of the Triangle Volume tools are reported using XML.

Unlike the End‐Area Volume tool, the Triangle Volume tool does not recognize components that are in the surfaces.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Calculate Triangle Volume

Exercise ‐ Calculate Triangle Volume

Compute Triangle Volume

1 Select Evaluation > Volumes > Triangle Volume.

2 Set Original Surface to Hemfield Existing.

3 Set Design Surface to Hemfield Finished.

4 Click Add, then Apply.

If the message “You need to set the Style Sheet...” appears, click OK and proceed with steps 5 and 6. Otherwise skip to step 7. This message indicates that the selected volume report type requires a default style sheet.


6 Select TriangleVolumes.xsl.


8 Close the Report Browser and the Triangle Volume dialog.

If you want TriangleVolumes.xsl to be the default format for all triangle volume reports, right‐click on TriangleVolumes.xsl and select Set as Default Triangle Volume.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Triangle Volume by Station

Triangle Volume by Station

The Triangle Volume by Station tool computes a hybrid volume. True volumes are calculated between two surfaces but only within a specified width from the centerline and between a station interval. The volume results are reported on a station‐by‐station basis, much like end‐area volumes.

The Triangle Volume by Station tool computes volumes directly from surfaces. Cross sections are not required. Similar to the end‐area volume calculations, the results of the Triangle Volume by Station tools are reported using XML.

Unlike the End‐Area Volume tool, the Triangle Volume by Station tool does not recognize components that are in the surfaces.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Triangle Volume by Station

Exercise ‐ Triangle Volume by Station

Computing Triangle Volumes by Station

1 Select Evaluation > Volumes > Triangle Volume by Station.

2 Set Original Surface to Hemfield Existing.

3 Set Design Surface to Hemfield Finished.

4 Click Apply.

If the message “You need to set the Style Sheet...” appears, click OK and proceed with steps 5 and 6. Otherwise skip to step 7. This message indicates that the selected volume report type requires a default style sheet.


6 Select BasicVolume.xsl.


8 Close the Report Browser and the Triangle Volume by Station dialog.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Generate end‐area volumes

• Create volumes reports

• Generate triangle volumes



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 Which volume calculation method(s) compare two surfaces to compute volumes?

A – End‐Area Volumes

B – Triangle Volumes

C – Triangle Volumes by Station

2 Which volume calculation method(s) use the graphics in the cross section to compute volumes?

A – End Area Volumes



3 Which volume calculation method(s) can compute volumes from components?






DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 Which volume calculation method(s) compare two surfaces to compute volumes?



Both the Triangle Volumes and Triangle Volumes by Station methods calculate volumes by comparing the difference between two surfaces.

2 Which volume calculation method(s) use the graphics in the cross section to compute volumes?


The End Area Volume method computes volumes by reading the graphics and calculating an area of cut and fill on each cross section. The end areas are averaged over the distance between the cross sections to calculate the volume.

3 Which volume calculation method(s) can compute volumes from components?


Only the End Area Volumes method can calculate volumes from components.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

15 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Create and compare an end‐area volume and triangle volume report.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Volumes\Task\Meadow Park Working.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Volumes\Task\Task ‐ Intro to Volumes.rwk.










DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Create end‐area volumes and a triangle volume report.

• Calculate triangle volumes between the existing ground and finished design surfaces.

• Save the end‐area volume and triangle volume reports to the folder C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Volumes\Task\.

Questions

• What is the total cut and fill based on the end‐area volume computation?

End‐Area Cut Volume _______________

End‐Area Fill Volume _______________

• What is the total cut and fill based on the triangle volume computation?

Triangle Cut Volume _______________

Triangle Fill Volume _______________

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Introduction to Reports

In this chapter, you will learn about the InRoads reporting system. You will generate and save the reports.

Dec‐2011 Introduction to Reports


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn about style sheets.

• Create fixed format reports.

• Generate an XML Report.

Introduction to Reports Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives





Open a CAD File

1 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Reports\Practice\.

2 Select the file Reports.dgn, then click Open.





2 Set the directory to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Reports\Practice\.

3 Select the file Practice ‐ Intro to Reports.rwk, then click Open.











DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

What is XML and XSL?

What is XML and XSL?

XML and XSL

XML is a structured ASCII format. It is similar to HTML, with which most web pages are created. Like a web page where data is presented by using a template, XML uses an XSL file to format the data. Both XML and XSL files are ASCII files.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

InRoads XML Report Process



XML reports are a by‐product of Bentley Civil’s support of the American Society of Civil Engineers’ (ASCE) initiative for a neutral file format to exchange alignment and surface data. This format is known as LandXML.

Why did ASCE and others pick XML as the standard to exchange data? XML files are ASCII files and can be read on any computer. The tags that XML uses to structure the data can be defined as a standard such as LandXML. Since XML is similar to HTML, there are many resources (books, training, experts, etc.) available to customize and format the data. An XSL file is a template that formats the XML data into something that can be printed or reused.

InRoads reports are the result of XML data formatted by an XSL file.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Quick Reports

Quick Reports

Quick Reports

There are several fixed‐format quick reports available in InRoads. These reports are frequently used during the design process when a quick check of the data is needed and the exact format of the report is not important. An example of one quick report is Geometry > Review Horizontal.

The report can be saved as an ASCII file, printed directly to a printer, appended to another ASCII file, or displayed in the CAD drawing.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Reviewing Horizontal Geometry


Reviewing Horizontal Geometry

1 Select Geometry > Review Horizontal.

The active horizontal alignment report is displayed.

2 After reviewing the report, close the dialog.

Many of the quick reports are also available by right‐clicking on an item in the InRoads Explorer window.

3 Select the Geometry tab at the bottom of the InRoads Explorer window.

4 Click the plus sign next to Hemfield to expand the Geometry Project list.

5 Right‐click the horizontal alignment named Hemfield Road and select Review.

The quick horizontal alignment report for this alignment appears.

6 Close the report.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Vertical Alignment Reports

1 Expand the Hemfield Road horizontal alignment to view its vertical alignments.

2 Right‐click the Hemfield Vertical vertical alignment and select Review.

The quick vertical alignment report for this alignment appears.

3 Close the report.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Review a Surface

Exercise ‐ Review a Surface

Review a Surface


2 Click Report on the Main tab.

3 Close both the report and the Surface Properties dialogs.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

XML Reports

XML Reports

XML Reports

XML Reports are found under Tools > XML Reports.

There are several different types of XML Reports that can be generated. The dialog box that is displayed depends on the tool that was selected.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Other XML Reports

Other XML Reports

Other XML Reports

As reviewed in the lesson on volumes, there are other places where XML report files are created.

• Volumes

• Roadway Designer

• Cross Section Reports



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Create Geometry Report


When creating XML reports, first the XML data file is created, then the report is formatted.

Creating a Geometry Report

1 Select Tools > XML Reports > Geometry.

2 Click in the Horizontal Alignment Include field.

3 Click the Filter button.

The available horizontal alignments are displayed on the left side of the dialog box.

4 Highlight the Hemfield Road alignment.

5 Click Add ‐> to select this alignment.

6 Click OK.

Hemfield Road should now be listed in the Include field.

You can also type the name of an alignment or use a wildcard to specify the alignment name.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


7 Select Include Vertical Alignments ‐ All.

8 Click Apply.

The Report Browser appears.

9 On the left side of the Bentley Report Browser, select the Geometry folder.

10 Select VerticalAlignmentReview.xsl.

A report opens showing all vertical alignments associated with the Hemfield Road horizontal alignment.

The .xml data file is placed in the temp directory and the data is formatted through the VerticalAlignmentReview.xsl style sheet.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Try Another Format

Exercise ‐ Try Another Format

The default XSL file used for the report is not the only format that can be used.

Try Another Format

1 On the left side of the Bentley Report Browser, in the Geometry folder, select HorizontalElementsXYZ.xsl.

Notice that the report format changed.

2 Try a few of the other formats.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Saving a Report for Printing



1 Select the XSL template HorizontalAndVerticalAlignmentReview.xsl.

2 Select File > Save As from the Bentley Report Browser.

3 Navigate to C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Reports\Practice\ and enter HorizontalVertical.html for File name.

4 Click Save.

Saving a Report to Microsoft Excel

1 Right‐click the report in the Bentley Report Browser window.

2 Select Export to Microsoft Excel from the pop‐up menu.

Microsoft Excel opens and the report data is added to a blank file.

3 After reviewing the report, close Microsoft Excel without saving the report.

The report format is not retained when saving to Excel by this method.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Microsoft Excel can read the HTML format report saved in the previous steps. When this report format is open in Excel, most of the formatting is retained.

Microsoft Excel must be installed to have this functionality.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Saving the XML

Saving the XML

Saving the XML

When the XML file is generated for the reports, the file is placed in a temporary directory. To save the xml file for later formatting, the file should be saved out. To review and save the format, use raw‐xml.xsl.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Changing the Format Options

Exercise ‐ Changing the Format Options

Change the Format Options

1 Select the HorizontalAlignmentReview.xsl format in the Bentley Report Browser.

The HorizontalAlignmentReview report template is located in the Geometry folder.

2 Select Tools > Format Options on the Report Browser.

3 Change the Northing/Easting Precision to a different number of decimal places.

Notice that as soon as the change is made, the report is updated.

4 Change a few other options and review the report.

5 Close Format Options dialog.

6 Close the Bentley Report Browser.

7 Close the Geometry Report dialog.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Exercise ‐ Station Base Report


Create a Station Base Report

1 Select Tools > XML Reports > Station Base.


3 Ensure that the Horizontal Alignment option is selected.

4 Ensure that the Horizontal Alignment is set to Hemfield Road.

5 Select the Include leaf.

6 Select the Interval option.

7 Enter 50 [10] for the Interval.

8 Select the Features leaf.

9 Ensure that the Surface is set to Hemfield Finished.

10 Select the Feature named Exterior Boundary.

11 Click Apply.

12 Select the StationBaseCoordinates.xsl report from the Station Offset folder.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3


Notice that the report lists the station along the alignment, the offset to the feature, and the coordinates of the feature.

13 Close the Report Browser and the Station Offset Report tool.




DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Volume and Template Reports



In the lesson on volumes, a report was created at the time the volume was calculated.

For Roadway Designer, the report is located on the Tools > Results Report menu. Similar to creating a surface, the model is calculated again so that all points are located in the proper location.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Summary and Review

Summary


• Understand style sheets.

• Create fixed format reports

• Generate XML formatted reports



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Questions:


1 True or False: XML Style Sheets (.xsl) define the format of each report.

• True

• False

2 True or False: All InRoads reports are XML reports.

• True

• False

3 List three types of XML reports.

1 – __________

2 – __________

3 – __________



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Summary and Review

Answers:

1 True or False: Style Sheets (.xsl) define the format of each report.

True – Style Sheets (.xsl) control and define how a report appears. Style sheets can be customized to create new report formats.

2 True or False: All InRoads reports are XML reports.

False – In addition to InRoads’ robust XML report capability, there are several quick format reports available throughout the software. Examples include the Review Horizontal, Review Vertical, and Review Geometry Points quick reports found on the Geometry menu.

3 List three types of XML reports.

1 – Geometry

2 – Station Base

3 – Station Offset

4 – Clearance

5 – Stakeout

6 – Legal Description

7 – Surfaces



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Review Task

Time Allocated

15 Minutes







DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Task Objective

Create geometry and clearance reports.

Source Data



2 Open the CAD file: C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Reports\Task\Meadow Park Working.dgn file.


C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Reports\Task\Task ‐ Intro to Reports.rwk.










DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task

Requirements

Exercise: Create geometry and clearance reports.

• Create a geometry report showing the coordinates and curve data for all of the horizontal and vertical alignments in this project.

• Create a report that lists the names, descriptions, and styles of all horizontal and vertical alignments in the geometry project.

• Create a clearance stakeout report from the centerline alignment named Meadow Park Drive to the toe of slope. The toe of slope is the Exterior Boundary feature in the finished design surface. The clearance report should start at Station 26+60 [1+885] and run to the end of the alignment.

• Save the reports to the folder C:\Bentley Training\InRoads Fundamentals\Intro to Reports\Task\.

Cleanup





DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Review Task



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Productivity Tools

In this chapter, you will learn about the InRoads Locks function and the benefits of using the tracking tools.

Dec‐2011 Productivity Tools


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Objectives

Objectives


• Learn about the Pen/Pencil Lock.

• Learn about the Style Lock.

• Learn about Tracking.

Productivity Tools Dec‐2011


DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

InRoads Locks

InRoads Locks

InRoads locks control how InRoads tools work when viewing, selecting or evaluating data. Because locks affect nearly every tool in InRoads, it is important to understand how locks work. Below is a brief introduction to the locks.

InRoads has two basic types of locks. There are locks that have an enabled/disabled state. There are also locks that switch between two or three different modes, but are always active.

Locks are accessed by selecting Tools > Locks from the InRoads menu. However, since the status or mode of the locks is frequently adjusted while running InRoads, the best practice is to display the locks toolbar for easy access. The locks Toolbar is displayed when you select Tools > Locks > Toolbar.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Style Lock

Style Lock

The Style Lock is used with surfaces. Surfaces can have preferences associated with them. When a view surface tool is used with the Style lock enabled, the dialog box for the command will not be displayed. Instead, your surface data will be displayed in the graphics file without any further input from you. The Style lock bypasses the dialog box and displays the active surface, automatically determining what symbology to use from the surface preference.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Pen/Pencil Lock

Pen/Pencil Lock

The Pencil/Pen lock controls what happens when graphics are re‐displayed from InRoads. For example, when surface graphics are re‐displayed, the setting of this lock determines if the previously displayed graphics are deleted prior to creating the new graphics.

The Pencil/Pen lock only applies to plan display; it does not apply to cross sections or profiles. There are two modes for this lock: Pen mode or Pencil mode.

• Pen graphics created in the CAD file are permanent and will not be deleted the next time InRoads is used to draw the same graphic. This is analogous to drawing in ink on paper, where the ink is not typically deleted when new graphics are added.

• Pencil graphics created in the CAD file are permanent but will automatically be deleted the next time InRoads is used to draw the same graphics. This is analogous to drawing with a pencil on paper, where the pencil is easily removed when new graphics are added.

InRoads users most often use the Pencil mode. Pen mode is typically limited to special situations.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Snap Lock

Snap Lock

The Snap Lock controls how InRoads snaps to geometry points or elements in the active geometry project when a target button is used to specify a position in the graphics file. Target buttons are found throughout the interface. Each button is indicated by the cross hair icon.

There are three modes for this lock: No Snap, Point Snap, or Element Snap.

No Snap – InRoads does not try to locate the nearest geometry point or element. The graphically selected coordinate or element is selected.

Point Snap – This enables users to snap to a point in the active geometry. Use this lock to aid in the placement process of geometry elements. For example, when you select a target button in a dialog box and then click in the CAD file, InRoads will locate the closest geometry point, not the graphic location. The geometry point does not need to be displayed graphically to be located.

Element Snap – This enables users to snap to geometry element (line, arc, spiral) in the geometry project. Use this lock to aid in using the direction, distance, length, radius, and/or angle of an existing geometry element to design a new element. InRoads snaps to the element nearest the data point placed in the CAD file.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Station Lock

Station Lock

The Station Lock controls how InRoads determines station intervals when a horizontal alignment begins at an odd‐numbered station. This lock applies to InRoads tools such as generating cross sections, running the Roadway Modeler, or generating station based reports.

There are two modes for this lock: enabled or disabled.

Enabled – If the first station is odd‐numbered, the software forces all subsequent stations to even numbers. For example, if the first station is 2+38 and the station interval is defined as 50, the software performs the command action at stations 2+38, 2+50, 3+00, 3+50...

Disabled – InRoads does not force stations to even‐numbered stations if the first station is an odd‐numbered station.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Report Lock

Report Lock

The Report Lock controls whether or not the command displays output in a dialog box as command calculations are performed.

There are two modes for this lock: enabled or disabled.

• Enabled – The command processes, stores results, and displays the results in an output dialog box.

• Disabled – The command processes and stores results without displaying them in an output dialog box.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Tracking

Tracking

This command dynamically displays the northing and easting coordinates of the cursor location, as well as the surface elevation, slope, and aspect based on the active surface. The dialog box also dynamically reports the cursor location in terms of station and offset from the active horizontal alignment.

You can annotate all or part of this information to the drawing file by placing a data point. Options that are toggled on are annotated. For example, to annotate only the station and offset values, toggle on the Station and Offset options.

If you interrupt this command to use another command, you can reactivate it by clicking the Activate button. After you click Activate, a data point will again place annotation in the drawing file.



DO

NO

T D

ISTR

IBU

TE -

Prin

ting

for

Stud

ent U

se is

Per

mitt

ed

Ch

anne

l Par

tner

: Arc

hway

Sys

tem

s In

c

Cla

ss D

ate:

02-

Apr

-201

3

Tracking



InRoads MicroStation

Documents

Transcript of InRoads MicroStation